Pioneer Stereo Receiver sc 9540 User Manual
Operating Instructions  
audio/video multi-channel receiver  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,  
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to  
CAUTION:  
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC  
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR  
The exclamation point within an equilateral  
triangle is intended to alert the user to the  
presence of important operating and  
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s  
enclosure that may be of sufficient  
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric  
shock to persons.  
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS  
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED  
SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the appliance.  
D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En  
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by  
the manufacturer.  
1) Read these instructions.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or  
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with  
the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution  
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to  
avoid injury from tip-over.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
4) Follow all instructions.  
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6) Clean only with dry cloth.  
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in  
accordance with the manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as  
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other  
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce  
heat.  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized  
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two  
blades with one wider than the other. A  
grounding type plug has two blades and a third  
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third  
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided  
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an  
electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or  
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from  
the apparatus.  
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms  
or when unused for long periods of time.  
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has  
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply  
cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled  
or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the  
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,  
does not operate normally, or has been dropped.  
P1-4-2-2_En  
WARNING  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires  
repair will be charged for even during the warranty  
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire  
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled  
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or  
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain  
or moisture.  
D3-4-2-1-3_B_En  
period.  
K041_En  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following  
section carefully.  
To prevent fire hazard, the Class 2 Wiring Cable  
should be used for connection with speaker, and  
should be routed away from hazards to avoid  
damage to the insulation of the cable.  
The voltage of the available power supply differs  
according to country or region. Be sure that the  
power supply voltage of the area where this unit  
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V  
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.  
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En  
WARNING  
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked  
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the  
equipment.  
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or  
cords associated with accessories sold with the  
product will expose you to chemicals listed on  
proposition 65 known to the State of California and  
other governmental entities to cause cancer and  
birth defect or other reproductive harm.  
Wash hands after handling  
D36-P4_A_En  
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC  
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed  
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and  
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of  
this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the  
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make  
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing  
the mains plug from the wall socket when left  
unused for a long period of time (for example, when  
on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate  
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.  
Contents  
Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s  
sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Switching components on and off using the 12 volt  
trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 38  
Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to  
the front panel input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Connecting an iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Plugging in the receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Flow of settings on the receiver 8  
01 Before you start  
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Checking what’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
02 Controls and displays  
04 Basic Setup  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Changing the OSD display language  
(OSD Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control). . . . . . . . . 42  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . 44  
The Input Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 45  
03 Connecting your equipment  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Determining the speakers’ application . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Other speaker connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Placing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Some tips for improving sound quality . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Installing your speaker system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround  
05 Basic playback  
Playing a source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Playing a source with HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . 46  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . 47  
Playing an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod . . . . . . . 47  
Playing a USB device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory  
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory  
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
About playable file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Listening to the radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Improving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Using the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Using Neural THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Saving station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Naming station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Listening to Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Listening to XM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Using XM HD Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Saving channel presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Using the XM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Listening to SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Saving channel presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Bi-amping your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Selecting the Surr Back system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
ZONE 2 setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Speaker B setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Bi-Amping setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
About the audio connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Connecting your TV and playback components . . . . . 26  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI  
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input . . . . . . . . . 28  
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and  
other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other  
set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . 31  
Connecting other audio components. . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Connecting additional amplifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Connecting AM/FM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Connecting external antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Connecting an XM Radio tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Connecting a SiriusConnect™ tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
MULTI-ZONE setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Making MULTI-ZONE connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
5
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
06 Listening to your system  
08 KURO LINK  
Auto playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Listening in surround sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Using Stream Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 61  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Setting the Up Mix function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Choosing the input signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band  
Making the KURO LINK connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Cautions on the KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
About connections with a product of a different  
brand that supports the KURO LINK function . . . . . 80  
KURO LINK Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Setting the PQLS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Before using synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
09 Using other functions  
Setting the Audio options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Switching the HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Checking your system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Using Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Using Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY  
inputs  
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Features of Home Media Gallery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Steps to enjoy the Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Playing back audio files on the network and  
listening to Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Connecting to the network through LAN interface . . . 67  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
About network playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Windows Media Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Windows Media DRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
DLNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Content playable over a network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
About playback behavior over a network . . . . . . . . . 68  
Authorizing this receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Playback with Home Media Gallery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Playing back audio files stored on components  
on the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Listening to Internet radio stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Listening to Rhapsody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Listening to Sirius Internet Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Listening to Neural Music Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Playing back your favorite songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
About playable file formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Advanced operations for Internet radio. . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Saving Internet radio stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Retrieving saved Internet radio stations . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Setting up the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Checking the network settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Checking about the Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Software update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
10 Controlling the rest of your system  
Operating multiple receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Setting the remote to control other components . . . . 89  
Selecting preset codes directly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Programming signals from other remote controls . . . 90  
Erasing the remote control button settings . . . . . . . . 90  
Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Programming a multi-operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Using multi operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Default preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Controls the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
6
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 The Advanced MCACC menu  
13 Additional information  
Speaker Setting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Positional relationship between speakers and  
Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC  
menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Fine Speaker Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Acoustic Cal EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Output PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Renaming MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Copying MCACC preset data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Clearing MCACC presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
No sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . 120  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Important information regarding the HDMI  
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
HOME MEDIA GALLERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
About status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
XM radio messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
SIRIUS radio messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . 129  
About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
About Neural – THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
About SIRIUS and XM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
About FLAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
FLAC Decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with  
12 The system and the other setup  
Making receiver settings from the System Setup  
menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Speaker Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
THX Audio Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
The Other Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Power ON Level Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Volume Limit Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Remote Control Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Flicker Reduction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
different input signal formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
7
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flow of settings on the receiver  
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily  
after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.  
The colors of the steps indicate the following:  
Required setting item  
Setting to be made as necessary  
The Input Setup menu (page 44)  
(When using connections other than the  
recommended connections)  
1
2
Before you start  
• Checking what’s in the box (page 10)  
• Loading the batteries (page 11)  
9
Determining the speakers’ application (page  
19)  
10 Basic playback (page 46)  
• 7.1ch surround connection  
11 Switching the HDMI output (page 87)  
• 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection  
• 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection  
• 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection  
12 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired  
• Using the various listening modes  
• Using surround back channel processing (page 61)  
• Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band  
Phase Control (page 63)  
• Measure the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/  
FRONT ALIGN) (page 96)  
• Change the channel level while listening (Tip on  
page 110)  
• Switches on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Sound  
retriever or Dialog Enhancement (page 82)  
• Setting the PQLS function (page 81)  
• Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness or  
Sound delay, etc.) (page 82)  
• Setting the Video options (page 83)  
Connecting the speakers  
• Placing the speakers (page 20)  
• Connecting the speakers (page 21)  
• Standard5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surroundconnections  
(page 22)  
3
4
• Bi-amping your speakers (page 23)  
Connecting the components  
• About the audio connection (page 24)  
• About the video converter (page 25)  
• Connecting your TV and playback components  
(page 26)  
• Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 33)  
• Plugging in the receiver (page 41)  
13 Other optional adjustments and settings  
• KURO LINK Setup (page 80)  
• The Advanced MCACC menu (page 95)  
• The system and the other setup (page 108)  
5
6
Power On  
Changing the OSD display language (OSD  
Language) (page 42)  
14 Making maximum use of the remote control  
Surround back speaker setting (page 109)  
• Operating multiple receivers (page 89)  
• Setting the remote to control other components  
(page 89)  
7
8
MCACC speaker settings  
• Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) (page 42)  
8
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Chapter 1:  
Before you start  
performance and operation, and hundreds of other  
parameters in both the digital and analog domain,  
making your home theater experience as faithful as  
possible to what the director intended.  
Our philosophy  
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater  
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of  
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they  
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing  
on three important steps:  
•
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby  
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby  
Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD  
Master Audio  
Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound  
right into your home with up to six channels of surround  
sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)  
channel for deep, realistic sound effects.  
1
Achieving the highest possible sound quality  
2
Allowing for customized acoustic calibration  
according to any listening area  
3
Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world-  
The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders  
not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby  
Surround sources, but will also generate convincing  
surround sound for any stereo source.  
class studio engineers1  
1 With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has  
been designated AIR Studios Monitor:  
Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you  
can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and  
DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.  
Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,  
which are designed for the next-generation high-  
definition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,  
support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.  
Features  
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology  
supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer  
rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is  
available only when signals are delivered to this receiver  
as primary audio).  
•
Direct Energy HD Amplifier  
Through a collaboration, Pioneer and ICEpower have  
jointly development a unique class D amplifier called a  
“Direct Energy High Fidelity Class D (HD) amplifier”. This  
new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding  
performance (high output of 700 W simultaneous) with  
high sound quality and reproduces the latest in multi-  
channel digital contents.  
DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners  
without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.  
•
Phase Control  
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this  
receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction  
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound  
image at your listening position.  
•
Easy setup using Advanced MCACC  
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate  
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced  
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This  
innovative technology measures the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to  
customize your system calibration with the help of a  
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen or  
using computer. With the additional benefits of  
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave  
control and microphone measurements from a series of  
reference points, your home theater experience can be  
truly customized for optimal surround sound.  
•
Full Band Phase Control  
The Full Band Phase Control feature analyzes the  
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers  
connected and corrects the phase distortion to the  
flattened frequency-phase characteristics. This  
correction minimizes the group delay of the middle- and  
low-frequency ranges against the high-frequency range  
and improves the frequency-phase characteristics  
across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-  
phase characteristics between channels ensure better  
surround sound integration.  
•
THX certified design  
This receiver bears the THX Select2 Plus logo, which  
means it has passed a rigorous series of quality and  
performance tests covering every aspect of the product.  
This includes testing of pre-amplifier and power amplifier  
9
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
•
Sound Retriever  
via HDMI. Also, the built-in digital video converter of this  
receiver makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling  
possible, and analog video signals being input are  
converted and output as digital video signals at the HDMI  
terminal.  
The Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to  
restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left  
over after compression. This helps bring CD quality  
sound back to WMA and MP3 audio files and achieves a  
richer sense of presence when playing Dolby Digital, DTS  
or WMA 9 Pro audio formats recorded in multiple  
channels on DVDs and other discs.  
•
XM and SIRIUS Ready  
With the XM and SIRIUS Radio terminals, you’ll be up  
and running in no time. This receiver’s enhanced  
compatibility makes XM HD Surround playback as well  
as on-screen control of your XM and SIRIUS Radio an  
added possibility.  
•
HOME MEDIA GALLERY  
This receiver can play back contents stored on your  
computer when your computer is connected to the LAN  
terminal of this receiver. Also, you can listen to the  
Internet radio stations.  
•
iPod/iPhone and USB Ready  
This receiver has the terminals for connecting an iPod/  
•
Front Stage Surround Advance  
iPhone unit and a USB mass storage device.  
With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature, you can  
enjoy seamless, natural surround sound effects using  
only the front speakers, without deteriorating the quality  
of the original sound.  
The iPod terminal is ready for handling digital audio and  
video, and this receiver’s enhanced compatibility makes  
on-screen control of your iPod an added possibility.  
The USB terminal allows you to listen to two-channel  
audio from a USB mass storage device connected to this  
receiver.  
•
Auto Level Control  
When the source is played in Auto level control mode  
(ALC), this receiver automatically equalizes the playback  
sound level according to the variation in recording levels.  
Checking what’s in the box  
•
Optimum Surround  
All movie creators do their best to express movie’s story  
and use sounds 50 % to achieve it. They assume that the  
finally mixed sounds should be best sound balance at  
movie theaters that can perform a big sound. However, in  
many cases, such a big sound is actually too much for  
customer’s Home Theater environment, smaller volume is  
normally used. In such case, there is possibility that the  
sound balance is changed/depressed compared to movie  
theaters. The volume is smaller, the possibility is higher. In  
short, smaller volume can NOT tell us stories properly as  
the same as creator’s intention.  
Please check that you’ve received the following supplied  
accessories:  
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))  
• Remote control unit  
• Dry cell batteries x2  
• AM loop antenna  
• FM wire antenna  
• iPod cable  
• Power cord  
“Optimum Surround” is a new Pioneer’s surround sound  
technology that has been newly developed to solve this  
problem. Throughout this development, Pioneer has been  
struggling to consider how we should provide creator’s  
intention properly with home theater’s sound. And Pioneer  
has found an answer =“Optimum Surround” led by two  
activities as follows. One of them is to know creator’s  
thought and feelings to communicate with actual  
• Warranty card  
• These operating instructions  
Installing the receiver  
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a  
level and stable surface.  
creators, and another is to invent some new sound tuning  
technologies based on Pioneer’s historical technologies.  
Don’t install it on the following places:  
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)  
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off  
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.  
– in direct sunlight  
– in damp or wet areas  
– in extremely hot or cold areas  
– in places where there is vibration or other movement  
– in places that are very dusty  
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)  
•
HDMI and digital video conversion  
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video  
format, providing you with high-definition digital video/  
audio via a single cable.  
High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby  
TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also  
compatible with the Deep Color and x.v.Color feature.  
You can operate this receiver in synchronization with  
your Pioneer component that supports the KURO LINK  
function by connecting your component to this receiver  
• Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the  
power is turned on. The bottom panel gets hot when  
the power is on, and touching it could cause burns.  
10  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Loading the batteries  
Operating range of remote control unit  
The remote control may not work properly if:  
• There are obstacles between the remote control and  
the receiver’s remote sensor.  
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the  
remote sensor.  
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting  
infrared rays.  
CAUTION  
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another  
infrared remote control unit.  
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as  
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:  
• Never use new and old batteries together.  
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries  
properly according to the marks in the battery case.  
• Batteries with the same shape may have different  
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.  
30°  
30°  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public institution’s rules that apply in your country or  
area.  
7 m (23 ft.)  
• WARNING  
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or  
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or  
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,  
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the  
life or performance of batteries.  
11  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
02  
Chapter 2:  
Controls and displays  
Remote control  
1
RECEIVER  
12  
13  
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
HDMI  
2
Input function buttons  
Press to select control of other components (see  
Controlling the rest of your system on page 89).  
1
2
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
3
Number buttons and other receiver/component  
controls  
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio  
frequency (page 52) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
1
2
3
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV.  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
Press  
first to access:  
RECEIVER  
4
5
6
3
4
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the input function  
(page 46).  
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
INPUT  
HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal  
(page 87).  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 63).  
14  
15  
TV CONTROL  
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets  
(page 62).  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
select the amount of time before sleep (page 86).  
5
6
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
SBch – Use to select the surround back/virtual surround  
back channel mode (page 61)  
.
PRESET  
ENTER  
PRESET  
RETURN  
A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog  
input signal to prevent distortion (page 86).  
CATEGORY  
HOME  
MENU  
TUNE  
iPod CTRL  
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 87).  
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,  
then use / to adjust the level (page 110).  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
HDD  
PGM  
Press TUNER first to access:  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
7
8
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio  
station directly using the number buttons (page 52).  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
CLASS – Switches between the seven banks (classes)  
of radio station presets (page 52).  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
16  
17  
9
10  
11  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
4
TV CONTROL buttons  
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to  
the TV operation selector switch. Thus if you only have  
one TV to hook up to this system assign it to the TV  
operation selector switch (see page 92 for more on this).  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
RECEIVER  
– Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.  
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.  
CH +/– – Use to select channels.  
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according  
to component control using the following system:  
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.  
• White – Receiver control, TV Control  
• Blue – Other controls  
12  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
02  
5
Tuner/component control buttons/HOME MENU  
STATUS – Press to check selected receiver settings  
These button controls can be accessed after you have  
selected the corresponding input function button (DVD,  
DVR, TV, etc.). The BAND and T.EDIT tuner controls are  
explained on page 52 and page 52.  
(page 87).  
PQLS – Press to select PQLS setting (page 81).  
8
9
AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on DVD or  
BD discs.  
DISP – Switches between named station presets and  
radio frequencies.  
Press  
first to access:  
RECEIVER  
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio  
options (page 82).  
CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/DVR units.  
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video  
options (page 83).  
REMOTE SETUP  
Use to input the preset code when making remote  
control settings and to set the remote control mode  
(page 89).  
HOME MENU – Use to access the Home Menu  
(pages 42, 44, 80, 95, 104, 106, 108 and 112).  
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current  
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu  
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).  
10 TV CTRL  
Use this button to set preset code of your TV’s  
manufacturer when controlling TV (see Selecting preset  
codes directly on page 89 for more on this).  
6
/// (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround  
sound system (see page 95) and the Audio or Video  
options (page 82 or 83). Also used to control DVD menus/  
options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player.  
Use TUNE/to find radio frequencies and use PRESET  
/ to find preset stations (page 52).  
11 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch  
Switch to perform operations in the main zone, ZONE 2  
and ZONE 3 (page 85).  
12 Remote control LED  
Lights when a command is sent from the remote control  
(page 89).  
7
Component/Receiver control buttons  
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a  
component after you have selected it using the input  
function buttons.  
13 SOURCE  
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the  
receiver (see page 89 for more on this).  
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after  
you have selected the corresponding input function  
button (for example DVD, DVR or TV). These buttons also  
function as described below.  
14 MASTER VOLUME +/–  
Use to set the listening volume.  
15 MUTE  
Press TUNER first to access:  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been  
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).  
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception  
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak, then switching  
RECEIVER  
16  
to mono will improve the sound quality (page 52)  
NOISE CUT MODE 1 or can be selected when this  
unit is receiving AM broadcasts.  
Press first to access:  
.
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to  
select the white commands above the number buttons  
(A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this button to set up surround  
sound.  
2
RECEIVER  
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between Auto  
Surround (page 57), Auto level control, Optimum  
17  
Press to turn on/off the illumination of some of the  
buttons.  
Surround mode and Stream Direct mode (page 60).  
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and  
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 60).  
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to  
switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and  
Neo:6 options (page 57).  
ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various  
surround modes (page 59).  
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode  
(page 58).  
PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase Control  
or Full Band Phase Control (page 63).  
13  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Front panel  
02  
1
2
3 4  
5
6
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER SC-9540  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
PQLS  
HDMI  
STANDBY/ON  
8
9 10 11 12  
13  
14  
15  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
(TUNE)  
VIDEO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
MULTI-ZONE  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
(PRESET)  
ENTER  
(TUNE)  
(PRESET)  
7
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI 4  
VIDEO CAMERA  
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
HOME MENU  
RETURN  
16  
STANDBY/ON  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
1
5
Character display  
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power  
See Display on page 15.  
indicator lights when the receiver is on.  
6
7
MASTER VOLUME dial  
Front panel controls  
When the KURO LINK function is set to ON, the power  
indicator lights when the power is in standby.  
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the  
lower third portion of the panel with your finger.  
2
INPUT SELECTOR dial  
Use to select an input function (page 46).  
3
PHASE CONTROL indicator – Lights to indicate  
Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control is selected  
(page 63).  
ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights when EQ is  
set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu  
(page 82).  
PQLS indicator – Lights when the PQLS feature is  
active (page 81).  
8
AUDIO PARAMETER  
HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-  
equipped component; lights when the component is  
connected (page 26).  
Use to access the Audio options (page 82).  
9
VIDEO PARAMETER  
Use to access the Video options (page 83).  
4
Remote sensor  
Receives the signals from the remote control (see  
Operating range of remote control unit on page 11).  
14  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
02  
10 ///  
(
TUNE  
/
PRESET) /ENTER  
14 MULTI-ZONE controls  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your HOME  
MENU. Use TUNE /to find radio frequencies and use  
PRESET / to find preset stations (page 52).  
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-  
ZONE setup on page 35) use these controls to control the  
sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE  
controls on page 85).  
11 TUNER EDIT  
Use with ////ENTER to memorize and name  
stations for recall (page 52).  
15 SPEAKERS  
Use to change the speaker system (page 84).  
12 BAND  
16 HOME MENU  
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 52).  
Press to access the Home Menu (pages 42, 44, 80, 95,  
104, 106, 108 and 112).  
13 Listening mode buttons  
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT – Switches  
between Auto Surround (page 57), Auto level control,  
Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode  
17 RETURN  
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.  
18 HDMI input connector  
(page 60)  
.
Use for connection to compatible HDMI device (Video  
camera, etc.). See Connecting an HDMI-equipped  
component to the front panel input on page 39.  
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening  
mode (page 58).  
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard  
decoding and to switch between the various 2 Pro  
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 57).  
19 iPod/iPhone/USB terminals  
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio and video  
source, or connect a USB device for audio and photo  
playback (page 40).  
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between  
the various surround modes (page 59).  
20 MCACC SETUP MIC jack  
Use to connect the supplied microphone (page 42).  
STEREO – Switches between stereo playback and  
Front Stage Surround Advance modes (page 60).  
21 PHONES jack  
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are  
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.  
Display  
1
2
3
45  
6
7
8
9 1011 12 13 14  
15  
16 17  
2
DIGITAL PLUS  
2
TrueHD WMA9Pro MULTI-ZONE PQLS ALC ATT STEREO  
DSD PCM FULL BAND  
TUNED  
AUTO  
PCM  
HDMI  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
L
C
R
SL  
SR  
DTS HD ES 96/24  
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER MONO  
dB  
XL XC XR  
TV  
DVD  
BD DVR  
CD TUNER SIRIUS  
CD-R  
VIDEO HMG USB  
XM  
[ 3 ]  
HDMI [ 2 ]  
[ 4 ]  
MSTR  
LFE  
PHONO iPod  
AUTO SURROUND  
STREAM DIRECT  
2
PROLOGIC  
THX ADV.SURROUND  
x
Neo:6  
STEREO STANDARD  
SP AB  
SLEEP  
8
18  
19 20 21  
22  
23  
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) indicators light  
when an LFE signal is being input)  
XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones above  
XC – Either one channel other than the ones above, the mono  
surround channel or matrix encode flag  
1
SIGNAL indicators  
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.  
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input  
signal automatically (page 63).  
3
Digital format indicators  
2
Program format indicators  
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format  
is detected.  
Light to indicate the channels being input when PCM  
signals are being input. They do not indicate the audio  
signals being output from the receiver.  
4
S.RTRV  
Lights when the Sound Retriever function is active  
(page 82)  
L/R – Left front/Right front channel  
C – Center channel  
SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel  
.
15  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
02  
5
MULTI-ZONE  
16 Input function indicators  
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 85).  
Light to indicate the input function you have selected.  
6
DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to  
PCM conversion with SACDs.  
PCM – Lights during playback of PCM signals.  
17 Scroll indicators  
Light when there are more selectable items when making  
the various settings.  
7
FULL BAND  
18 Speaker indicators  
Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on  
(page 64).  
Lights to indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B  
(page 84).  
8
Listening mode indicators  
19 SLEEP  
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 86).  
AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto Surround  
feature is switched on (page 57).  
20 Matrix decoding format indicators  
ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level control) mode  
is selected (page 60).  
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2 Pro  
Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 57).  
Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver  
is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 57)  
STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure Direct is  
selected (page 60).  
.
ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the  
Advanced Surround modes has been selected  
(page 59).  
21 MSTR  
Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master Audio signal.  
22 Character display  
Displays various system information.  
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched  
on (page 59).  
23 Remote control mode indicator  
Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode  
setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.)  
STANDARD – Lights when one of the Standard  
Surround modes is switched on (page 57).  
THX – Lights when one of the Home THX modes is  
selected (page 58).  
9
(PHASE CONTROL)  
Lights when the Phase Control or Full Band Phase  
Control is switched on (page 63).  
10 Analog signal indicators  
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal  
(page 86).  
11 UP MIX  
Lights when the Up Mix is switched on (page 62).  
12 Tuner indicators  
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.  
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being  
received in auto stereo mode.  
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using  
MPX.  
13 SOUND  
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or tone  
controls feature is selected (page 82).  
Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on.  
14  
Lights when the sound is muted (page 13).  
15 Master volume level  
Shows the overall volume level.  
“---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates  
the maximum level.  
16  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Chapter 3:  
Connecting your equipment  
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the  
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.  
Rear panel  
1
2
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
HDMI  
AC IN  
R  
1
3XM  
IN  
6
11  
16  
20  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
(DVR)  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
PR  
PB  
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
1
IAL  
(DVD)  
(VIDEO 1)  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
ABLE  
(KURO  
4
1
-
3
13  
ASSIGNABLE  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
(DVD)  
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
US  
L  
(Single)  
L
OUT  
2
7
12  
14  
15  
17  
IN  
2
(CD)  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R
VIDEO  
8
BD  
IN  
SUBWOOFER  
IN  
1
N  
1
ZONE 2  
OUT  
ZONE 3 PHONO  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO1  
IN  
VIDEO2  
IN  
DVR  
OUT IN  
MULTI CH IN  
CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
5
(V/SAT)  
OUT  
IN  
18  
IN  
2
L
L
IN  
2
IN  
1
(DVR)  
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
3
R
(VIDEO1)  
9
SUBWOOFER  
FRONT  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
KERS  
Class 2 Wiring  
B
A
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
SURROUND BACK/  
(Single)  
SURROUND  
CENTER  
R
L
R
L
R
L
19  
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
10  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
4
Coaxial digital audio inputs (x2)  
CAUTION  
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/  
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.  
See also The Input Setup menu on page 44 to assign  
the inputs.  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.  
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the  
top of the receiver.  
5
Optical digital audio inputs (x4)/outputs (x2)  
Use the OUT jack for recording to a CD or MiniDisc  
recorder.  
See Connecting other audio components on page 32.  
Use the IN jacks for digital audio sources, including DVD  
players/recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players,  
etc.  
See also The Input Setup menu on page 44 to assign  
the inputs.  
1
HDMI connectors (x6)  
Multiple inputs and two outputs for high-quality audio/  
video connection to compatible HDMI devices.  
See Connecting your TV and playback components on  
page 26.  
6
12 V trigger jacks (total 50 mA max.) (x2)  
Use to switch components in your system on and off  
according to the input function of the receiver.  
See Switching components on and off using the 12  
volt trigger on page 38.  
See Switching the HDMI output on page 87.  
7
SIRIUS Radio input  
2
LAN (10/100) terminal  
See Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs on  
See Connecting a SiriusConnect™ tuner on page 34.  
page 66.  
XM Radio input  
See Connecting an XM Radio tuner on page 34.  
8
Remote inputs/output  
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor  
for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.  
See Connecting an IR receiver on page 37.  
3
17  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
9
Control input/output  
19 Speaker terminals  
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you  
can control all your equipment from a single IR remote  
sensor.  
See Operating other Pioneer components with this  
unit’s sensor on page 37.  
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround  
and surround back speakers.  
See Connecting the speakers on page 21.  
20 AC power inlet  
Connect the supplied power cord here.  
See Plugging in the receiver on page 41.  
10 RS-232C connector  
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when  
using Advanced MCACC or Full Band Phase Control.  
See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on  
page 38.  
11 Component video inputs (x3)  
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has  
component video output, such as a DVD player.  
See Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output  
on page 27.  
12 MULTI-ZONE audio/video outputs  
Use to connect a second or third amplifier and monitors  
or TVs in a separate room.  
See MULTI-ZONE setup on page 35.  
13 Composite, S-Video and Component video monitor  
outputs  
Use to connect monitors and TVs.  
See Connecting your TV with no HDMI input on  
page 28.  
14 Stereo analog audio source inputs (x3)/output (x1)  
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,  
tape decks, turntables, etc.  
See Connecting other audio components on page 32.  
15 Audio/video source inputs (x5)/output (x1)  
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD  
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks  
for composite video, S-Video and stereo analog audio.  
See Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other  
video sources on page 30.  
16 AM and FM antenna terminals  
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio  
broadcasts.  
See Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 33.  
17 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs  
Use to connect separate amplifiers for front, center,  
surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.  
See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 33 (see  
also Installing your speaker system on page 22 for  
powered subwoofer connection).  
18 Multichannel analog audio inputs  
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with  
multichannel analog outputs.  
See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on  
page 31.  
18  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
[3] 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection  
(Multi Zone)  
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy  
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo  
playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The  
selection of input devices is limited.)  
Determining the speakers’ application  
Surround sound with a strong sense of presence can be  
enjoyed by connecting 7 speakers and 1 subwoofer. It is  
also possible to achieve high sound quality using bi-amp  
connections and to enjoy music in other rooms using the  
MULTI-ZONE feature. High sound quality can be  
achieved with a minimum of two speakers.  
• Surr Back System setting: ZONE 2  
• Be sure to connect speakers to the front left and right  
L
Front  
left  
SW  
R
Front  
right  
R
channels (  
and  
).  
L
L
Left  
R
Right  
C
• The Surr Back System setting must be made if you  
use any of the connections shown below other than  
[1] (see Selecting the Surr Back system on page 24).  
Center  
Subwoofer  
ZONE 2  
Surround  
Surround  
left  
[1] 7.1ch surround connection  
(Simple connection & Best surround)  
*Default setting  
right  
SR  
SL  
These connections prioritize surround sound with a  
speaker layout like that in a movie theater.  
[4] 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection  
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy  
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo  
playback of the same sound on the B speakers.  
• Surr Back System setting: Normal (default)  
• If you have six speakers, either only connect one  
surround back speaker (6.1 ch surround), or connect  
for the 7.1-channel setting as shown on the diagram  
below but without the center speaker.  
• Surr Back System setting: Speaker B  
Speaker B  
L
Front  
left  
SW  
R
Front  
right  
C
L
Front  
left  
SW  
R
Front  
right  
Center  
C
Subwoofer  
Center  
Subwoofer  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
left  
SR  
SL  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
SR  
SL  
SBL  
Surround  
back left  
SBR  
Surround  
back right  
Other speaker connection  
• Your favorite speaker connections can be selected  
even if you have fewer than 5.1 speakers.  
[2] 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping connection  
(High quality surround)  
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high  
sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.  
• When not connecting a subwoofer, connect speakers  
with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the  
front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency  
component is played from the front speakers, so the  
speakers could be damaged.)  
• Surr Back System setting: Front Bi-Amp  
•
After connecting, be sure to conduct the Auto  
MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure.  
See Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 42.  
L
Front  
left*  
SW  
R
Front  
right*  
C
Center  
Subwoofer  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
left  
SR  
SL  
*Bi-amp compatible speaker  
19  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Placing the speakers  
03  
THX speaker system setup  
If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the THX  
INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer has one)  
or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.  
To achieve the best possible surround sound, install your  
speakers as shown below.  
See also THX Audio Setting on page 111 to make the  
settings that will give you the best sound experience  
when using the Home THX modes (page 58).  
5.1 channel surround system:  
Center  
Front right  
Front left  
Some tips for improving sound quality  
Subwoofer  
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect  
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines  
should help you to get the best sound from your system.  
120°  
120°  
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the  
other speakers should be at about ear-level when  
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the  
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very  
high on a wall is not recommended.  
Surround  
Surround  
left  
right  
6.1 channel surround system:  
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers 2  
m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at equal distance from  
the TV.  
Center  
Front left  
Front right  
Subwoofer  
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front  
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a  
narrower angle.  
120°  
120°  
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so  
that the sound of the center channel is localized at  
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker  
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of  
the front left and right speakers.  
Surround  
Surround  
right  
left  
Surround Back  
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening  
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.  
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.  
7.1 channel surround system:  
• Surround and surround back speakers should be  
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft. to 3 ft.) higher than  
your ears and tilted slight downward. Make sure the  
speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the  
speakers should be more directly behind the listener  
than for home theater playback.  
Center  
Front left  
Front right  
Subwoofer  
90°  
90°  
Surround  
Surround  
right  
• If the surround speakers cannot be set directly to the  
side of the listening position with a 7.1-channel  
system, the surround effect can be enhanced by  
turning off the Up Mix function (see Setting the Up  
Mix function on page 62).  
left  
60°  
Surround back  
Surround back  
left  
right  
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away  
from the listening position than the front and center  
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound  
effect.  
20  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting the speakers  
03  
CAUTION  
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.  
This not only improves sound quality, but also  
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from  
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of  
external shocks such as earthquakes.  
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a  
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to  
match these up with the terminals on the speakers  
themselves.  
CAUTION  
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE  
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when  
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,  
disconnect the power cord before touching any  
uninsulated parts.  
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted  
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.  
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel  
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.  
Bare wire connections  
1
2
3
Twist exposed wire strands together. (fig. A)  
Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire. (fig. B)  
Tighten terminal. (fig. C)  
fig. A  
10 mm ( / in.)  
fig. B  
fig. C  
3
8
Banana plug connections  
If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana  
plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut, then plug  
the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.  
Important  
• Please refer to the manual that came with your  
speakers for details on how to connect the other end  
of the speaker cables to your speakers.  
• Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. It is not  
possible to connect using speaker cables.  
21  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Installing your speaker system  
03  
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always  
be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the  
left surround back terminal).  
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections  
Center  
Subwoofer  
Front left  
Front right  
LINE LEVEL  
INPUT  
1
2
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
12 V  
HDMI  
AC IN  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
(DVR)  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
1
(DVD)  
(VIDEO 1)  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
1
-
3
ASSIGNABLE  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
PR  
P
B
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
SIRIUS  
IN  
SIGNAL  
GND  
(Single)  
L
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
S-VIDEO  
PRE OUT  
R
IR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
BD  
IN  
SUBWOOFER  
IN  
1
IN  
1
ZONE 2  
OUT  
ZONE 3 PHONO  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO1  
IN  
VIDEO2  
IN  
DVR  
OUT IN  
MULTI CH IN  
(TV/SAT)  
OUT  
IN  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
IN  
2
L
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
3
R
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
SUBWOOFER  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
Class 2 Wiring  
B
A
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
SURROUND BACK/  
(Single)  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
R
L
R
L
R
L
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
The surround back terminals can also be  
used for the Speaker B and ZONE 2.  
7.1 ch surround setting  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
6.1 ch surround setting  
Surround back  
No connect  
Speaker B setting  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Speaker B - Right  
Speaker B - Left  
ZONE 2 setting  
ZONE 2 - Left  
ZONE 2 - Right  
22  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Bi-amping your speakers  
Bi-amp compatible  
Bi-amp compatible  
speaker  
speaker  
Center  
Subwoofer  
High  
Low  
High  
Low  
Front right  
Front left  
1
2
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
12 V  
HDMI  
AC IN  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
(DVR)  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
1
(DVD)  
(VIDEO 1)  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
1
-
3
ASSIGNABLE  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
PR  
P
B
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
(Single)  
SIRIUS  
IN  
SIGNAL  
GND  
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
S-VIDEO  
L
PRE OUT  
IR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
R
BD  
IN  
SUBWOOFER  
IN  
1
IN  
1
ZONE 2  
OUT  
ZONE 3 PHONO  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO1  
IN  
VIDEO2  
IN  
DVR  
MULTI CH IN  
(TV/SAT)  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
IN  
2
L
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
AUDIO  
R
IN  
3
R
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
SUBWOOFER  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
Class 2 Wiring  
B
A
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
SURROUND BACK/  
(Single)  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
R
L
R
L
R
L
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
Surround right  
Surround left  
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver  
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different  
amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your  
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate  
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement  
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.  
Bi-wiring your speakers  
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-  
amping.  
• With these connections, the Surr Back System  
setting makes no difference.  
•
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to  
the speaker terminal on the receiver.  
Using a banana plug for the second connection is  
recommended.  
CAUTION  
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals  
have two metal plates that connect the High to the  
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are  
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely  
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for  
more information.  
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,  
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing  
so may damage your speakers.  
CAUTION  
• Don’t connect different speakers from the same  
terminal in this way.  
• When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for bi-  
amping shown at the left.  
23  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Selecting the Surr Back system  
03  
About the audio connection  
The surround back terminals can be used for bi-amping,  
Speaker B and ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the  
surround back speakers. Make this setting according to  
the application.  
There are several types of audio input and output  
terminals on this receiver. The receiver selects the first  
available signal in the following order when you choose  
AUTO as the input signal:  
ZONE 2 setup  
Types of cables and  
terminals  
Transferable audio  
signals  
With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy  
5.1-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo  
playback on another component in ZONE 2.  
HDMI  
HD audio  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back  
speaker terminals.  
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections  
on page 22.  
Digital (Coaxial)  
Conventional digital audio  
Conventional analog audio  
2
Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Surr Back System menu.  
Digital (Optical)  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 109 to do this.  
Speaker B setup  
You can listen to stereo playback in another room.  
RCA (Analog)  
(White/Red)  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back  
speaker terminals.  
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections  
on page 22.  
2
Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Surr Back System  
menu.  
• With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals can be  
transferred in high quality over a single cable.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 109 to do this.  
Bi-Amping setup  
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high  
sound quality with 5.1-channel surround sound.  
CAUTION  
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when  
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter  
protecting the optical socket.  
1
Connect Bi-amp compatible speakers to the front  
and surround back speaker terminals.  
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 23.  
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable  
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.  
2
Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the Surr Back System  
menu.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 109 to do this.  
24  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
About the video converter  
03  
The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR OUT jacks. The only  
exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s  
1
HDMI video outputs when connecting this video source.  
If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 44), the  
converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-Video, then composite (in that order).  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
PQLS  
HDMI  
STANDBY/ON  
This receiver  
Source device  
TV monitor  
Terminal for  
Terminal for  
connection with TV  
connection with  
monitor  
source device  
Types of cables  
HDMI IN  
HDMI OUT  
PR  
PB  
Y
PB  
PR  
Y
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
S-VIDEO IN  
VIDEO IN  
S-VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
Video signals can be output  
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends  
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the  
Video options on page 83) OFF.  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims of certain  
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned  
by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended  
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless  
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
Note  
1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that  
some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion  
(in Setting the Video options on page 83) OFF.  
• The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and  
1080i. 1080p signal cannot be converted.  
• Only signals with an input resolution of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the composite and S-Video MONITOR  
OUT.  
25  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your TV and playback components  
Connecting using HDMI  
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.), you can connect it to this  
receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.  
If the TV and playback components support the Pioneer KURO LINK feature, the convenient KURO LINK functions can  
be used (see KURO LINK on page 79).  
Other HDMI/DVI-  
equipped component  
HDMI IN  
HDMI OUT  
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor  
or flat panel TV  
HDMI/DVI-compatible  
Blu-ray disc player  
Select one  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
R
L
ANALOG  
OPTICAL  
This connection is  
HDMI OUT  
required in order to  
listen to the sound of  
the TV over the receiver.  
1
2
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
12 V  
HDMI  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
(DVR)  
OUT  
ANTEN  
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
1
(DVD)  
(VIDEO 1)  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
1
-
3
ASSIGNABLE  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
PR  
P
B
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
SIRIUS  
IN  
SIGNAL  
GND  
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
S-VIDEO  
IR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
ZONE 2  
OUT  
ZONE 3 PHONO  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
V
(TV/SAT)  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
Class 2 Wiring  
B
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
SURROUND BACK/  
(Single)  
R
L
R
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
• When connecting a Blu-ray disc player, connect the  
player to the receiver’s BD IN terminal.  
• If your Blu-ray disc player offers multi-channel analog  
audio outputs, see Connecting the multichannel  
analog inputs on page 31.  
• When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible  
monitor or a flat panel TV using the HDMI OUT 2  
terminal, switch the HDMI output setting to HDMI  
OUT 2 or HDMI OUT ALL. See Switching the HDMI  
output on page 87.  
• The sound of the TV cannot be heard over the receiver  
if the TV is connected using an HDMI cable.  
If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the  
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio  
cables.  
• The HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an  
HDMI-equipped component is connected.  
• For input components, connections other than HDMI  
connections are also possible (see Connecting your  
DVD player with no HDMI output on page 27).  
26  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output  
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no  
HDMI output) to the receiver.  
DVD player, etc.  
Select one  
Select one  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
R
L
ANALOG  
PR  
PB  
Y
HDMI/DVI-compatible  
monitor or flat panel TV  
HDMI IN  
1
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
12 V  
HDMI  
GGER  
XM  
IN  
UTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
(DVR)  
OUT  
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
1
(DVD)  
(VIDEO 1)  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
1
-
3
ASSIGNABLE  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
2
PR  
P
B
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
SIRIUS  
IN  
SIGNAL  
GND  
O
IN  
2
(CD)  
S-VIDEO  
IR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
ZONE 2  
OUT  
ZONE 3 PHONO  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
DVD  
IN  
T
(TV/SAT)  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
Class 2 Wiring  
B
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
SURROUND BACK/  
(Single)  
R
L
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
• If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the  
receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio  
cables.  
• Component video should give superior picture quality  
when compared to composite or S-Video. You can  
also take advantage of progressive scan video (if your  
source and TV are both compatible), which delivers a  
very stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that  
came with your TV and source component to check  
whether they are compatible with progressive-scan  
video.  
• If your DVD player offers multi-channel analog audio  
outputs, see Connecting the multichannel analog  
inputs on page 31.  
27  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input  
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the  
receiver.  
• With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI cable.  
Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite, S-VIDEO or component cord.  
DVD player, etc.  
Select one  
Select one  
DIGITAL OUT  
HDMI OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
PR  
PB  
Y
TV  
1
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
12 V  
HDMI  
IGGER  
XM  
IN  
OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
(DVR)  
OUT  
1
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
(DVD)  
(VIDEO 1)  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
1
-
3
ASSIGNABLE  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
2
PR  
P
B
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
SIRIUS  
IN  
SIGNAL  
GND  
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
S-VIDEO  
IR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
Select one  
BD  
IN  
VIDEO IN  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
1
IN  
1
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
ZONE 2  
OUT  
ZONE 3 PHONO  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
DVD  
IN  
T
(TV/SAT)  
OUT  
IN  
PR  
PB  
Y
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
AUDIO  
R
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
Class 2 Wiring  
B
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
SURROUND BACK/  
(Single)  
R
L
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
• Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio  
on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to input  
video signals.  
Depending on the video component, it may not be  
possible to output signals connected by HDMI and  
other methods simultaneously, and it may be  
necessary to make output settings. Please refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with your component  
for more information.  
• Component video should give superior picture quality  
when compared to composite or S-Video. You can  
also take advantage of progressive scan video (if your  
source and TV are both compatible), which delivers a  
very stable, flicker-free picture. See the manuals that  
came with your TV and source component to check  
whether they are compatible with progressive-scan  
video.  
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,  
you can connect these instead. See also see  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on  
page 31.  
28  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
1
• The input functions below are assigned by default to  
the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to The  
Input Setup menu on page 44 to change the  
assignments if other connections are used.  
For example, the BD terminal is fixed to BD input; no  
other audio and video signals can be input to this  
terminal.  
About HDMI  
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital  
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the  
connected component is compatible with, including  
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby  
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for  
limitations), Video CD/Super VCD and CD. See About the  
video converter on page 25 for more on HDMI  
compatibility.  
Input Terminals  
Input function  
Digital  
HDMI  
Component  
IN 1  
This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface (HDMI™) technology.  
DVD  
COAX-1  
BD  
(BD)  
This receiver supports the functions described below  
through HDMI connections.  
TV/SAT  
DVR  
OPT-1  
OPT-2  
OPT-3  
IN 2  
IN 3  
• Digital transfer of uncompressed video (contents  
protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
HDMI 3  
2
• Deep Color signal transfer  
2
• x.v.Color signal transfer  
(HDMI-1)  
(HDMI-2)  
(HDMI-3)  
(HDMI-4)  
• Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital audio  
signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels  
• Input of the following digital audio formats:  
HDMI 4  
(front panel)  
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High bitrate  
audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio), DVD-  
Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD  
CD  
COAX-2  
OPT-4  
CD-R/TAPE  
• Synchronized operation with components using the  
KURO LINK function (see KURO LINK on page 79)  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing, LLC.  
“x.v.Color” and x.v.Color logo are trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
Note  
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content  
Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection,  
however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.  
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some  
components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video  
this is not a malfunction.  
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.  
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however,  
make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.  
2 Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.  
29  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video sources  
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices,  
including HDD/DVD recorders and VCRs.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The  
Input Setup menu on page 44).  
HDD/DVD recorder, VCR, etc.  
Select one  
Select one  
VIDEO OUT  
S-VIDEO VIDEO  
Select one  
Select one  
VIDEO IN  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL IN  
DIGITAL OUT  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
ANALOG  
R
L
ANALOG  
OPTICAL  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
1
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
12 V  
HDMI  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
(DVR)  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
1
(DVD)  
(VIDEO 1)  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
1
-
3
ASSIGNABLE  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
2
PR  
PB  
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
FRON  
SIRIUS  
IN  
SIGNAL  
GND  
OUT  
2
IN  
S-VIDEO  
IR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
ZONE 2  
OUT  
ZONE 3 PHONO  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO1  
IN  
VIDEO2  
IN  
DVR  
(TV/SAT)  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
FRON  
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
CONTROL  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
Class 2 Wiring  
B
A
R
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
SURROUND BACK/  
(Single)  
SURROUND  
R
L
R
L
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
30  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or  
other set-top box  
Connecting the multichannel analog  
inputs  
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV  
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may  
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending  
on whether your player supports surround back  
channels). Make sure that the player is set to output  
multichannel analog audio.  
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the  
receiver which input you connected the set-top box to  
(see The Input Setup menu on page 44).  
DVD player, etc.  
STB  
Select one  
Select one  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
AUDIO OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
SUBWOOFER  
OUTPUT  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
CENTER  
OUTPUT  
SURROUND  
OUTPUT  
R
SURROUND BACK  
OUTPUT  
R
L
ANALOG  
COAXIAL OPTICAL  
R
L
L
R
L
1
2
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
12 V  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
(DVR)  
ANTENNA  
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
(DVD)  
(VIDEO 1)  
ANTENNA  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
Y
1
-
3
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
1
-
3
LE  
PR  
P
B
Y
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
SIRIUS  
IN  
SIGNAL  
GND  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
(Single)  
IN  
2
(CD)  
S-VIDEO  
L
PRE OUT  
R
IR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
SUBWOOFE
IN  
1
ZONE 2  
OUT  
ZONE 3 PHONO  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDE  
IN  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO1  
IN  
VIDEO2  
IN  
DVR  
IN  
(TV/SAT)  
OUT  
IN  
MULTI CH IN  
OUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
L
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
R
SUBWOOFER  
CONTROL  
OUT  
SPEAKERS  
Class 2 Wiring  
B
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
SURROUND BACK/  
(Single)  
R
L
R
A
SURROUND  
FRONT  
CENTER  
gle)  
R
R
L
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
OUT  
1
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
OPTICAL  
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to  
the SURROUND BACK L jack on this receiver.  
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround  
speakers for the surround channel, not the surround  
back channel.  
31  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting other audio components  
This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback.  
This receiver features five stereo audio-only inputs. One of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with audio  
recorders.  
One of the audio inputs (PHONO) is a dedicated turntable input which should not be used for any other type of  
component. This input also has a grounding terminal that most turntables require.  
Most digital components also have analog connections.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The  
Input Setup menu on page 44).  
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.  
Turntable  
Select one  
Select one  
AUDIO OUT  
AUDIO IN  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL IN  
R
L
ANALOG  
R
L
ANALOG  
OPTICAL  
1
2
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
12 V  
HDMI  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
(DVR)  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
PR  
PB  
Y
PR  
P
B
Y
1
(DVD)  
(VIDEO 1)  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
1
-
3
ASSIGNABLE  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
PR  
P
B
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT  
SIRIUS  
IN  
SIGNAL  
GND  
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
S-VIDEO  
IR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
ZONE 2  
OUT  
ZONE 3 PHONO  
C
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
DVD  
IN  
TV/SAT  
IN  
VIDEO1  
IN  
(TV/SAT)  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
3
IDEO1)  
IN  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
Class 2 W
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
SURROUND BACK/  
SUR  
Single)  
R
R
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
OUT  
OUT  
1
2
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
• If you’re connecting a recorder, connect the analog  
audio outputs to the analog audio inputs on the  
recorder.  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder  
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9  
1
Professional (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to  
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using HDMI, coaxial  
or optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9  
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected DVD  
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro  
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital  
output.  
Turntables only:  
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the  
ground terminal on this receiver.  
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a  
built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs  
instead.  
Note  
1 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be  
downsampled to 48 kHz.  
32  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting additional amplifiers  
Connecting AM/FM antennas  
This receiver has more than enough power for any home  
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every  
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the  
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power  
your speakers.  
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna  
as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality,  
connect external antennas (see Connecting external  
antennas below).  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
1
2
L
Front channel  
amplifier  
R
ANALOG  
INPUT  
3
Center channel  
amplifier (mono)  
ANTENNA  
5
ANALOG  
INPUT  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
L
4
Surround channel  
amplifier  
R
fig. b  
fig. a  
fig. c  
AM LOOP  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
(Single)  
L
L
PRE OUT  
R
Surround back  
channel amplifier  
R
SUBWOOFER  
DVR  
MULTI CH IN  
FROENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK  
OUT  
IN  
L
ANALOG  
INPUT  
R
SUBWOOFER  
1
Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna  
A
FRONT  
CENTER  
R
L
wires.  
Powered  
subwoofer  
2
Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into  
each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM  
antenna wires.  
3
Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.  
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround  
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In  
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))  
terminal only.  
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction  
indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the  
stand (fig. b).  
• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other  
surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before  
clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the  
reception is clear.  
• The sound from the surround back terminals will  
depend on how you have configured the Surround  
back speaker setting on page 109.  
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the  
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any  
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.  
4
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a  
direction giving the best reception.  
5
Connect the FM wire antenna in the same way as  
If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker  
setting (see Speaker Setting on page 109) to LARGE.  
the AM loop antenna.  
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a  
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.  
33  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting external antennas  
To improve FM reception connect an external FM  
antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.  
Connecting an XM Radio tuner  
After purchasing an XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock  
(both sold separately), you will also need to activate the  
XM Radio service to begin receiving broadcasts.  
1
2
IN  
1
12 V  
HDMI  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
TL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
OUT  
PR  
(DVD)  
PB  
Y
75 Ω coaxial cable  
1
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
SIRIUS  
IN  
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
IR  
VIDEO  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
ZONE  
OUT  
2
ZONE  
OUT  
3
(TV/SAT)  
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
CAUTIO  
SPEAKER I  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
AT TEN  
ENCEINTE  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTA  
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE  
M
ASSIGNABLE  
1
MANUAL D'EMPLO  
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m (16 ft. to  
20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP  
terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop  
antenna.  
SATELLiTE  
RADiO  
SATELLiTE RADiO  
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally  
outdoors.  
XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock  
with antenna  
Outdoor  
antenna  
• For instructions on playing the XM Radio, see  
Listening to XM Radio on page 53.  
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated wire)  
Connecting a SiriusConnect™ tuner  
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts, you will  
need to activate your SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
ANTENNA  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
PR  
PB  
Y
OUT  
1
FM UNBAL 75  
AM LOOP  
(DVD)  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(KURO  
LINK  
5 m to 6 m  
(16 ft. to 20 ft.)  
)
IN  
1
(DVD)  
(CD)  
2
SIRIUS  
IN  
OUT  
2
IN  
2
IR  
VIDO  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
ZONE  
OUT  
2
ZONE  
OUT  
3
(TV/SAT)  
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
CAUTIO  
SPEAKER I  
ASSIGNABLE  
AT TEN  
ENCEINTE  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTA  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE  
M
ASSIGNABLE  
1
Antenna  
MANUAL D'EMPLO  
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
SIRIUS  
H
SiriusConnect™  
AC adapter  
HOME tuner  
You will also need to connect the antenna and AC  
adapter to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
• For instructions on playing the SIRIUS Radio, see  
Listening to SIRIUS Radio on page 55.  
34  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
MULTI-ZONE setup  
03  
This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-  
ZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE connections (and  
the way you choose to connect them) depends on how you want to set up your system.  
Main zone  
Sub zone (ZONE 3)  
Sub zone (ZONE 2)  
1
IN  
1
12 V  
HDMI  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
PR  
PB  
Y
(DV  
OUT  
(DVD)  
1
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
2
PR  
VIDEO IN  
VIDEO IN  
SIRIUS  
IN  
SI  
G
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
IR  
VIDEO  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
ZONE 2  
OUT  
ZONE 3 PH  
OUT  
(TV/SAT)  
IN  
2
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
AUDIO IN  
AUDIO IN  
R
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
R
L
L
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDA  
ATTENTIO  
ENCEINTE D'IMPE  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
Different sources can be playing in three zones at the  
same time or, depending on your needs, the same source  
can also be used. The main and sub zones have  
independent power (the main zone power can be off  
while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub  
zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel  
controls. However, you may need to specify the volume  
settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 113.  
MULTI-ZONE listening options  
The following table shows the signals that can be output  
to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3:  
Sub Zone  
ZONE 2  
Input functions available  
a
Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT).  
b
With video signals, the composite video  
(VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT) signals can be output.  
a
ZONE 3  
Making MULTI-ZONE connections  
It is possible to make these connections if you have a  
separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub  
Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT).  
b
With video signals, the composite video  
(VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT) signals can be output.  
1
zone, and a separate TV and a separate amplifier (and  
a.Any analog signal. (This does not apply for the MULTI CH IN and  
PHONO inputs.)  
b.JPEG files cannot be played with the input set to USB input.  
speakers) for your secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will  
also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the  
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on  
page 36 for your primary sub zone. There are two primary  
sub zone setups possible with this system. Choose  
whichever works best for you.  
Note  
1 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub  
zone. You can, however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.  
35  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)  
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)  
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back speaker setting  
on page 109 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the  
sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling  
the main zone (for example, changing the input function  
or starting playback).  
•
Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2  
OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT  
jack, both on this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub  
zone amplifier as shown below.  
•
Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT  
Main zone  
Sub zone (ZONE 2)  
jacks on this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the  
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.  
1
2
IN  
1
12 V  
HDMI  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
PR  
PB  
OUT  
(DVD)  
1
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
Main zone  
Sub zone (ZONE 2)  
VIDEO IN  
SIRIUS  
IN  
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
IN  
1
IN  
2
IN  
3
IR  
VIDEO  
(DVR)  
PR  
PB  
Y
P
R
PB  
Y
(DVD)  
(VIDEO 1)  
BD  
IN  
1
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
1
IN  
1
ZONE 2  
OUT  
Z
PR  
PB  
Y
COMPONENT VIDE  
(TV/SAT)  
VIDEO IN  
MONITOR OUT  
SIGNAL  
GND  
IN  
2
IN  
(DVR)  
2
S-VIDEO  
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
AUDIO IN  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
ZONE  
OUT  
3
PHONO  
IN  
CD  
IN  
CD-R/TAPE  
OUT IN  
DVD  
IN  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
R
L
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
C
L
ASSIGNABLE  
SP  
L
R
A
AUDIO  
EN  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
R
SELECTABLE  
S
SEE INSTRUCTION VO  
MANUAL D'  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
SPEAKERS  
Class 2 Wiring  
B
SURROUND BACK/  
R
L
(Single)  
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
CAUTION:  
LAN  
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
ATTENTION:  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDANCE DE 6 Ω - 16 Ω .  
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 3)  
Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 3  
•
OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT  
jack, both on this receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub  
zone amplifier as shown below.  
Main zone  
Sub zone (ZONE 3)  
1
2
IN  
1
12 V  
HDMI  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
(D  
P
OUT  
PR  
PB  
Y
1
(DVD)  
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
VIDEO IN  
(KURO  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
SIRIUS  
IN  
S
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
IR  
VIDEO  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
ZONE  
OUT  
2
ZONE  
OUT  
3
(TV/SAT)  
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
AUDIO IN  
R
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
R
L
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKER
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
CAUTION  
SPEAKER IMPE  
ASSIGNABLE  
ATTENTIO  
ENCEINTE D'IM  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MOD  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
36  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting an IR receiver  
03  
Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor  
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or  
shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote  
control in another zone, you can use an optional IR  
receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your  
system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of  
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks  
which can be used to link components together so that  
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.  
When you use a remote control, the control signal is  
1
this receiver.  
2
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.  
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on  
the rear of this receiver.  
Important  
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you  
also have at least one set of analog audio, video or  
HDMI jacks connected to another component for  
grounding purposes.  
Closet or shelving unit  
Non-Pioneer  
1
2
12 V  
component  
HDMI  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
(D  
OUT  
1
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
1
Decide which component you want to use the  
remote sensor of.  
When you want to control any component in the chain,  
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the  
corresponding remote control.  
(KURO  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
SIRIUS  
IN  
IR  
IN  
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
IR  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
(TV/SAT)  
IN  
2
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component  
OUT  
IN  
3
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
connection.  
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
Pioneer  
component  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
S
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
ASSIGNABLE  
IR  
VIDEO  
1
-
3
CONTROL  
BD  
IN  
OUT  
2
IN  
1
IN  
1
RS-232C  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
ZONE  
OUT  
3
PHO  
IN  
LAN  
(TV/SAT)  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
CAUTION:  
ASSIGNABLE  
SPEAKER IMPEDANC  
ATTENTION  
ENCEINTE D'IMPEDA  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABLE  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MODE  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
MANUAL  
D'EMPLOI  
-
3
IR receiver  
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
2
Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the  
IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the  
IR receiver.  
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for  
the type of cable necessary for the connection.  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR  
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor below to connect to the  
CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
Continue the chain in the same way for as many  
components as you have.  
Note  
1 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.  
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR  
compatibility.  
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.  
2 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see Setting the remote to control other components on  
page 89.  
• If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the  
remote sensor.  
37  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Switching components on and off using  
the 12 volt trigger  
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC  
output  
You can connect components in your system (such as a  
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on  
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input  
function. However, you must specify which input  
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup  
menu on page 44. Note that this will only work with  
When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
(see page 101) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of  
your listening room, the 3D graphs of the reverb  
characteristics and group delay characteristics in your  
listening room (before and after calibration) can be  
checked on a computer screen by connecting the  
receiver to the computer and using a special application  
to transfer the data. The various MCACC parameters can  
also be checked on the computer.  
1
components that have a standby mode.  
1
12 V  
HDMI  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect  
the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C  
jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be  
cross type, female–female).  
(D  
OUT  
12V  
1
COAXIAL  
TOTAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(KURO  
50 mA  
MAX)  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
(DVD)  
2
SIRIUS  
IN  
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
IR  
12 V  
TRIGGER  
BD  
IN  
The software to output the results is available from the  
support area of the Pioneer website (http://  
www.pioneerelectronics.com/PUSA/  
Home+Entertainment+Custom+Install). Instructions  
for using the software are also available here. If you have  
any questions regarding, please contact the Customer  
Support Division of Pioneer.  
IN  
1
IN  
1
(TV/SAT)  
IN  
2
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
IN  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
S
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
Please make sure your system meets the following  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
requirements:  
• The computer must be a PC functioning with one of  
the following operating systems: Microsoft®  
Windows® Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/  
Ultimate SP1, Windows® XP Professional/Home  
Edition SP3 or Windows® 2000 Professional SP4.  
•
Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to  
the 12 V trigger of another component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
connection.  
• The monitor must have a display resolution of 800 x  
600 dots (SVGA) or greater.  
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.  
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch  
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on  
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on  
page 44.  
• The computer must be equipped with at least one RS-  
232C port.2  
• System must have internet access.  
®
®
®
®
Microsoft , Windows Vista, Windows XP and Windows 2000 are  
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in  
the United States and/or other countries.  
Note  
1 Triggered connections with up to two devices compatible with 12 volt triggers can be made with this receiver.  
2 Laptops and other computers not equipped with an RS-232C port can be connected via USB port using a commercially available USB to  
RS-232C converter cable (USB to serial converter cable). For instructions on COM port connections and settings, contact the manufacturer  
of your computer.  
38  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
•
Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on the  
rear panel of the receiver.  
Make sure that the receiver and all connected  
components are switched off and disconnected from the  
Connecting an HDMI-equipped  
component to the front panel input  
1
There is an HDMI input terminal on the front panel. High  
quality pictures can be viewed via the receiver simply by  
connecting an HDMI-equipped video camera with a  
single HDMI cable. HDMI-equipped components other  
than video cameras can also be connected to this  
terminal.  
power outlet when you do this.  
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS-  
232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on  
this receiver. See the documentation provided with the  
Advanced MCACC application for more information.  
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel  
door to access the front panel input.  
1
IN  
1
12 V  
HDMI  
TRIGGER  
XM  
IN  
(OUTPUT  
12V  
TOTAL  
50 mA  
MAX)  
P
(DVD)  
R
PB  
Y
(D  
P
OUT  
1
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
• Select this input using HDMI, INPUT SELECT  
(remote) or the INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to  
select HDMI 4.  
LINK  
)
IN  
1
2
SIRIUS  
IN  
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
IR  
VIDEO  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
1
ZONE  
OUT  
2
ZONE  
OUT  
3
(TV/SAT)  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
IN  
2
L
IN  
(DVR)  
2
IN  
1
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
MULTI-ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
AUDIO  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
OUT  
R
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
iPod  
iPhone  
IN  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
2
SPEAKERS  
HDMI  
4
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
VIDEO CAMERA  
PHONES  
CAUTION  
SPEAKER IMPE  
ASSIGNABLE  
ATTENTI  
ENCEINTE D'IM  
OUT  
1
IN  
3
SELECTABLE  
SELECTABL  
This receiver  
SEE INSTRUCTION VOIR LE MOD  
MANUAL D'EMPLOI  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
OUT  
2
RS-232C  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
RS-232C  
Video camera, etc.  
Personal computer  
Note  
1 The various parameters, the reverb characteristics data and group delay characteristics data used for display on the computer are not cleared  
when the power is turned off (see Output PC on page 106).  
39  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Connecting an iPod  
03  
Connecting a USB device  
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow  
you to control playback of audio or video content from  
your iPod using the controls of this receiver.  
It is possible to playback files using the USB interface on  
the front of this receiver.  
•
Switch the receiver into standby then connect your  
•
Switch the receiver into standby then use the  
USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of  
this receiver.  
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel  
door to access the USB terminal.  
supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod/  
iPhone/USB terminal on the front panel of this  
receiver.  
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel  
door to access the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.  
• For instructions on playing the USB device, see  
Playing a USB device on page 49.  
• It is also possible to connect using the cable included  
with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view  
pictures via the receiver.  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
MULTI-ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
• For the cable connection, refer to also the operating  
instructions for iPod.  
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI 4  
VIDEO CAMERA  
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
• For instructions on playing the iPod, see Playing an  
iPod on page 47.  
This receiver  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
USB mass  
storage device  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
MULTI-ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
iPod  
iPhone  
USB  
HDMI  
4
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO CAMERA  
PHONES  
This receiver  
iPod cable  
(supplied)  
MENU  
  
iPod  
40  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Plugging in the receiver  
03  
Only plug in after you have connected all your  
components to this receiver, including the speakers.  
1
Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket  
on the back of the receiver.  
2
Plug the other end into a power outlet.1  
CAUTION  
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull  
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the  
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could  
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place  
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the  
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never  
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The  
power cords should be routed so that they are not  
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can  
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the  
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,  
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent  
service company for a replacement.  
• Do not use any power cord other than the one  
supplied with this unit.  
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose  
other than that described below.  
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the  
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular  
use, e.g., when on vacation.  
• Make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone  
out before unplugging.  
Note  
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any  
operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver  
once it has stopped blinking. When you set the KURO LINK mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the KURO LINK feature,  
see KURO LINK on page 79.  
41  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
04  
Chapter 4:  
Basic Setup  
6
Select ‘OK’ to change the language.  
Changing the OSD display language  
(OSD Language)  
4c.OSD Language  
A/V RECEIVER  
Language  
:
English  
The language used on the Graphical User Interface  
screen can be changed.  
OK  
• The explanations in these operating instructions are  
for when English is selected for the GUI screen.  
Exit  
Return  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
HDMI  
The setting is completed and the System Setup menu  
reappears automatically.  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
CATEGORY  
iPod USB TUNER  
INPUT  
SIRIUS  
HOME  
MENU  
iPod CTRL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
Automatically setting up for surround  
sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase  
Control)  
MAIN  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Use RECEIVER to switch on.  
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic  
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account  
ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and  
tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you  
have set up the microphone provided with your system,  
the receiver uses the information from a series of test  
tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization  
for your particular room, and also to calibrate the  
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers  
connected.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
2
Press  
HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit  
the current menu.  
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU  
.
4
Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup  
menu.  
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a  
source on page 46.  
4.SystemSetup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4c.OSD Language  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
Language  
:
English  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
Important  
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not  
OK  
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
5
Select the desired language.  
• English  
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the  
headphones should be disconnected and the iPod/  
USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM or SIRIUS Radio  
function should not be selected as an input function.  
• French  
• German  
• Italian  
• Spanish  
• Dutch  
• Russian  
42  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
04  
4
Select Surr Back System setting,3 select an MCACC  
preset4, then select START 5  
CAUTION  
.
Select Normal (Surround back), Speaker B, Front Bi-  
Amp or ZONE 2 for the Surr Back System setting  
according to connections to the surround back speaker  
terminals.  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
HDMI  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
5
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re  
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to  
a comfortable volume level.  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
CATEGORY  
HOME  
MENU  
iPod CTRL  
iPod USB TUNER  
INPUT  
SIRIUS  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
MAIN  
6
Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
speaker configuration in the GUI screen.  
Use RECEIVER to switch on.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
2
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
jack on the front panel.  
6
• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel  
door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.  
it’s doing this.  
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the  
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,  
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this  
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in  
step 7.  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
(TUNE)  
VIDEO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
MULTI-ZONE  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
(PRESET)  
ENTER  
(TUNE)  
(PRESET)  
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient  
noise! or Check microphone.) select RETRY after  
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when  
using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the  
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a  
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI  
4
USB  
MCACC  
VIDEO CAMERA  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
HOME MENU  
RETURN  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that  
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you  
do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the  
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
Now Analyzing...  
2/10  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
10  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
1
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
microphone.  
:
:
:
OK  
Speaker YES/NO  
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the  
2
microphone is connected.  
OK  
RETRY  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
Cancel  
1a.Full Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
Surr Back System  
Save SYMMETRY to : M1.MEMORY 1  
:
Normal  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker  
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a  
problem with the speaker connection.  
START  
Exit  
Return  
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power  
RECEIVER  
to the receiver operation mode.  
3
Press  
Note  
1 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.  
2 • You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM or SIRIUS Radio input function is selected (in either the  
main or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 85), you can’t use the HOME MENU.  
• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.  
3 • For details on the speaker layout and the Surr Back System setting, see Determining the speakers’ application on page 19.  
• If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back  
speaker setting on page 109 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 5.  
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select Return, then select Auto MCACC for the THX Speaker setting. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 96 for more on this.  
4 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now  
(you can rename it later in Data Management on page 106).  
5 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select Return, then select Auto MCACC to save other correction curves  
(such as ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 96 for more on this.  
6 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
43  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
04  
and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t  
seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to  
select the speaker and / to change the setting  
and continue.  
The Input Setup menu  
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu  
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to  
the default settings (see Input function default and  
possible settings on page 45). In this case, you need to  
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which  
terminal so the buttons on the remote control  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring  
(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker  
1
connections.  
– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power,  
disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.  
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure  
again.  
– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
correspond to the components you’ve connected.  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
PARAMETER  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
HDMI  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
CATEGORY  
7
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
HOME  
MENU  
iPod CTRL  
iPod USB TUNER  
INPUT  
SIRIUS  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
MAIN  
optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker  
Distance, Standing Wave, Acoustic Cal EQ and Full Band  
Phase Control.  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Use RECEIVER to switch on.  
RECEIVER  
on the remote control, then press  
2
Press  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.  
HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
8
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and  
the Home Menu menu reappears automatically.2  
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver  
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.  
3
4
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU  
.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using The  
Advanced MCACC menu on page 95 or The system and  
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.  
4.SystemSetup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4b.Input Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
Input  
Input Name  
Input Skip  
:
:
:
DVD  
Rename  
OFF  
3
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
the other setup on page 108.  
Digital In  
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1  
---  
Comp-1  
OFF  
HDMI Input  
Component In  
12V Trigger1  
12V Trigger2  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup  
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto  
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the  
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check  
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,  
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch  
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions  
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.  
OFF  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
5
Select the input function that you want to set up.  
The default names correspond with the names next to the  
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or VIDEO1)  
which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote  
control.  
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of  
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,  
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.  
Note  
1 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective  
speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.  
2 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Checking MCACC Data on page 104 for more on this.  
3 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with  
different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 108.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking  
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend  
adjusting the settings manually.  
44  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Setup  
04  
6
Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your  
Input function default and possible settings  
The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the  
name of one of the input functions. If you have connected  
components to this receiver differently from (or in  
addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu  
on page 44 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up.  
The dots () indicate possible assignments.  
component.  
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical  
output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s  
Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical  
input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to 4)  
corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the  
back of the receiver.  
Input Terminals  
Input  
• If your component is connected via a component  
video cable to an input terminal other than the  
default, you must tell the receiver which input  
terminal your component is connected to, or else you  
may see the S-Video or composite video signals  
function  
Digital  
HDMI  
Component  
IN 1  
a
DVD  
COAX-1  
b
BD  
(BD)  
a
TV/SAT  
DVR  
OPT-1  
OPT-2  
OPT-3  
IN 2  
IN 3  
1
instead of the component video signals.  
a
7
When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for  
a
VIDEO1  
VIDEO2  
HDMI 1  
HDMI 2  
HDMI 3  
HDMI 4  
other inputs.  
There are three optional settings in addition to the  
assignment of the input jacks:  
a
(HDMI-1)  
(HDMI-2)  
(HDMI-3)  
• Input Name – You can choose to rename the input  
function for easier identification. Select Rename to  
do so, or Default to return to the system default.  
b
(HDMI-4)  
• Input Skip – When set to ON, that input is skipped  
when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT or the  
front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial. (DVD and other  
inputs can be still be selected directly with the input  
function buttons.)  
HOME  
MEDIA  
GALLERY  
iPod/USB  
XM  
• 12V Trigger1/2 – After connecting a component to  
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components  
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 38), select  
MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding  
trigger setting to switch it on automatically along  
with the (main or sub) zone specified.  
CD  
COAX-2  
OPT-4  
CD-R/TAPE  
TUNER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH IN  
SIRIUS  
a
4b.Input Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Input  
Input Name  
Input Skip  
:
:
:
DVD  
Rename  
OFF  
Digital In  
:
:
:
:
:
COAX-1  
---  
Comp-1  
OFF  
HDMI Input  
Component In  
12V Trigger1  
12V Trigger2  
a.With KURO LINK set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see  
KURO LINK on page 79).  
b.This assignment is fixed and cannot be changed.  
OFF  
Exit  
Finish  
8
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the System Setup menu.  
Note  
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options  
on page 83), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
45  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Chapter 5:  
Basic playback  
When not using a surround back speaker, DOLBY  
DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital 5.1  
channel signals.  
Playing a source  
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such  
If the display does not correspond to the input signal and  
listening mode, check the connections and settings.  
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
HDMI  
4
Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is  
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.  
HDD  
DVD  
PGM  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
Playing a source with HDMI connection  
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
•
Use INPUT SELECT to select the HDMI input you’ve  
INPUT  
SELECT  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
HDMI OUT  
connected to (for example, HDMI 1).  
1
2
3
REMOTE  
SETUP  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
You can also perform the same operation by using the  
INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing  
HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.  
4
5
6
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.  
Start by switching on the playback component (for  
example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you  
have one), then the receiver (press RECEIVER).  
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options  
on page 82 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI  
audio output from your TV or flat panel TV (no sound  
will be heard from this receiver).  
1
• Make sure the setup microphone is disconnected.  
2
Select the input function you want to play.  
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat  
panel TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your  
component or display. Note that some components  
(such as video game units) have resolutions that may  
not be converted. In this case, use an analog video  
connection.  
You can use the input function buttons on the remote  
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT  
SELECTOR dial.  
2
RECEIVER  
3
Press  
, then press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT  
(
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO  
SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.3  
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s  
digital out jack.  
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound  
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are  
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the  
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.  
• See also Listening to your system on page 57 for  
information on different ways of listening to sources.  
It is possible to check on the front panel display whether  
or not multi-channel playback is being performed  
properly.  
When using a surround back speaker, 2D+PLIIx  
MOVIE is displayed when playing Dolby Digital 5.1  
channel signals, and DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when  
playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.  
Note  
1 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO1 jacks on your TV, make  
sure that the VIDEO1 input is now selected).  
2 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 63).  
3 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby  
Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.  
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must  
be set to a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 57 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround  
sound.  
46  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Main Zone:  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs  
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as  
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs  
iPod  
A/V RECEIVER  
Playlists  
Artists  
Albums  
Songs  
1
for surround sound playback.  
Podcasts  
Genres  
Composers  
Audiobooks  
1 / 9  
1
Make sure you have set the playback source to the  
proper output setting.  
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to  
output multichannel analog audio.  
iPod CTRL  
Sub Zone:  
RECEIVER  
, then use INPUT SELECT to select  
2
Press  
MULTI CH IN  
.
iPod  
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front  
panel.  
[
[
Playlists  
Artists  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
[ Albums  
[
[
[
[
[
Songs  
Podcasts  
Genres  
Composers  
Audiobooks  
1/9  
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the  
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be  
too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer  
can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup  
in Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input  
Setup on page 112.  
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod  
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage  
of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver.  
4
You can also control all operations for music in the front  
panel display of this receiver.  
Playing an iPod  
Finding what you want to play  
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow  
When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can  
browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name,  
album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to  
using your iPod directly.  
you to control playback of audio content from your iPod  
using the controls of this receiver.  
2
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
See Connecting an iPod on page 40.  
1
Use / to select a category, then press ENTER to  
• It is also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod  
itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see  
Switching the iPod controls on page 48.  
browse that category.  
• To return to the previous level any time, press  
RETURN.  
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the  
2
Use / to browse the selected category (e.g.,  
receiver to the iPod/USB  
.
albums).  
Loading appears in the GUI screen while the receiver  
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.  
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.  
When the display shows iPod top menu you’re ready to  
3
play music from the iPod.  
Note  
1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.  
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.  
• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 112.  
2 • This system is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano, iPod fifth generation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod touch and iPhone.  
However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The system is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.  
•
Compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod and iPhone. Please be sure to use the latest available software  
version.  
• iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.  
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.  
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of  
recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.  
• When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub  
zone from the one playing in the main zone.  
3 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.  
4 • Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.  
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod. To display video clips, switch iPod operation to the iPod (see Switching  
the iPod controls on page 48).  
• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.  
47  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
Basic playback controls  
want to play, then press  
Main Zone:  
to start playback.1  
The following table shows the basic playback controls for  
your iPod. Press iPod USB to switch the remote control  
to the iPod/USB operation mode.  
Track number  
Track title  
Button  
What it does  
Track Title  
Top Menu  
PLAY  
3:02  
-2:02  
Play mode  
Artist name  
Press to start playback.  
Shuffle Songs  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
xxxx/xxxx  
If you start playback when something other than a  
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that  
category will play.  
Album title  
iPod  
Now Playing  
Playing time  
File information  
List  
Pauses/unpauses playback.  
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Chapter Number : xxx/xxx  
/  
/  
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.  
Press to skip to previous/next track.  
iPod CTRL  
Sub Zone:  
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One  
,
Repeat All and Repeat Off  
.
Track number  
Play  
xxxx/xxxx  
Chapxxx/xxx  
File information  
Track title  
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle  
Songs, Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.  
Track Title  
Shuffle Songs  
-2:02  
Play mode  
Playing time  
DISP  
Press repeatedly to change the song playback  
information displayed in the front panel display.  
3:02  
Artist name  
Album title  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
ENTER  
When browsing, press to move to next levels.  
During playback, press to set the play and pause  
modes.  
Navigation through categories on your iPod looks like this:  
RETURN  
When browsing, press to move to previous levels.  
Playlists Songs  
Artists Albums Songs  
Albums Songs  
/  
When browsing, press to move to previous/next  
levels.  
Songs  
/  
During Audiobook playback, press to switch the  
playback speed: Faster Normal Slower  
Podcasts  
Genres Artists Albums Songs  
Composers Albums Songs  
Audiobooks  
TOP MENU  
Press to return to the iPod top menu screen.  
2
Shuffle Songs  
Switching the iPod controls  
You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod  
and the receiver.  
Tip  
1
Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.3  
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category  
by selecting the All item at the top of each category  
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a  
particular artist.  
This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this  
receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become  
inactive.  
2
Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver  
controls.  
Note  
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.  
2 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.  
3 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver. However, when video clips recorded on the iPod are played, the  
playback picture is displayed.  
48  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Playing back audio files stored on a USB  
memory device  
Playing a USB device  
1
The maximum number of levels that you can select in  
Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can display and play back  
up to 30 000 folders and files within a USB memory  
It is possible to playback files using the USB interface on  
the front of this receiver.  
4
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
device.  
2
See Connecting a USB device on page 40.  
1
Use / to select ‘Music’ from the USB Top menu.  
2
Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the  
USB Top  
A/V RECEIVER  
Music  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
receiver to the iPod/USB  
.
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this receiver starts  
recognizing the USB device connected. When the  
display shows USB Top menu you’re ready to playback  
from the USB device.  
Music  
Photos  
Slideshow Setup  
Folder1  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Music1  
Music2  
Music3  
Music4  
Music5  
1 / 9  
3
1 / 3  
Main Zone:  
Return  
USB Top  
A/V RECEIVER  
2
Use / to select a folder, then press ENTER to  
Music  
Photos  
browse that folder.  
Slideshow Setup  
• To return to the previous level any time, press  
RETURN.  
1 / 3  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
want to play, then press  
to start playback.5  
Sub Zone:  
Main Zone:  
USB Top  
Track number  
[ Music  
[ Photos  
[ Slideshow Setup  
]
]
]
Track title or File name  
Playing time  
Track Title  
Top Menu  
PLAY  
Play mode  
Artist name  
Album title  
3:02  
-2:02  
Random On  
xxxx/xxxx  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
1/3  
USB  
Important  
Now Playing  
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx  
If an Over Current message lights in the display, the  
power requirements of the USB device are too high for  
this receiver. Try following the points below:  
File information  
Return  
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.  
• Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched  
off.  
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the  
device) for USB power.  
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB  
device is incompatible.  
Note  
1 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players  
(MP3 players) of format FAT12/16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback.  
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for  
any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.  
2 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.  
3 • When a USB memory device with a large capacity is connected, it may take some time to read all the contents.  
• This receiver does not support a USB hub.  
4 Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.  
5 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.  
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the GUI screen instead; when neither the  
album name nor the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.  
• Playback stops when the last song in a USB memory device is played back to the end.  
• Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.  
• DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.  
• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.  
49  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Sub Zone:  
2
Use / to select a folder, then press ENTER to  
browse that folder.  
Track title or File name  
• To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.  
Play  
3:02  
xxxx/xxxx  
Track number  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
want to play, then press  
The selected content is displayed in full screen and starts  
a slideshow.  
to start playback.2  
Track Title  
Play mode  
Random On  
-2:02  
Playing time  
Artist name  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles  
between play and pause (only when Theme on the  
Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF)).  
Album title  
Basic playback controls  
Basic playback controls  
The following table shows the basic playback controls for  
your USB memory device. Press iPod USB to switch the  
remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.  
Button  
What it does  
ENTER, Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.  
RETURN  
,
Stops the Player and returns to the previous menu.  
Button  
What it does  
a
Displays the previous photo content.  
Press to start playback.  
a
Displays the next photo content.  
Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.  
Displays the photo information.  
Pauses/unpauses playback.  
Press and hold during playback to start scanning.  
Press to skip to previous/next track.  
a
/  
/  
a
DISP  
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat One  
Repeat Folder Repeat All and Repeat Off  
,
a.You can only use this button when Theme on the Slideshow Setup  
is set to Normal (OFF).  
,
.
Press repeatedly to switch between Random On  
and Random Off.  
Slideshow Setup  
Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo  
files here.  
DISP  
Press repeatedly to change the song playback  
information displayed in the front panel display.  
ENTER  
When browsing, press to move to next levels.  
During playback, press to set the play and pause  
modes.  
1
Use / to select ‘Slideshow Setup’ from the USB  
Top menu.  
USB Top  
Slideshow Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
RETURN  
When browsing, press to move to previous levels.  
A/V RECEIVER  
Music  
Photos  
Theme  
Interval  
BGM  
Music Select  
Folder1  
:
:
:
:
Normal(OFF)  
5 sec  
ON  
Select  
/  
When browsing, press to move to previous/next  
levels.  
Slideshow Setup  
TOP MENU Press to return to the USB Top menu.  
3 / 3  
Return  
Playing back photo files stored on a USB  
memory device  
1
2
Select the setting you want.  
• Theme – Add various effects to the slideshow.  
1
Use / to select ‘Photos’ from the USB Top  
menu.  
• Interval – Set the interval for switching the photos.  
This may not be available depending on the Theme  
setting.  
USB Top  
A/V RECEIVER  
Music  
Photos  
Slideshow Setup  
• BGM – Play music files stored on the USB device  
while displaying photos.  
• Music Select – Select the folder containing the  
2 / 3  
music files to be played when BGM is set to ON.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the USB Top menu.  
Note  
1 Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.  
2 If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes, the list screen reappears.  
50  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
About playable file formats  
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback  
although they are listed as playable file formats.  
Music files  
Category Extension Stream  
a
.mp3  
MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio Layer-3  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
MP3  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
8 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
8 bit, 16 bit  
VBR/CBR  
WAV  
.wav  
LPCM  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
2 ch, Monaural  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
b
WMA  
.wma  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
WMA8/9  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
8 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
VBR/CBR  
a.“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”  
b.Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,  
Voice.  
Photo files  
Category Extension  
JPEG  
.jpg  
.jpeg  
.jpe  
.jif  
Format  
Meeting the following conditions:  
• Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF format)  
a
• Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4 , 4:2:2 or 4:2:0  
Resolution  
30 to 8192 pixels vertical, 40 to 8192 pixels horizontal  
.jfif  
a.The maximum playable resolution for 4:4:4 is 5120 x 8192 pixels.  
51  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
The Neural THX mode can be selected also with  
STANDARD (page 57).  
Listening to the radio  
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and  
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and  
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the  
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a  
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can  
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving  
station presets below for more on how to do this.  
Tuning directly to a station  
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the  
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply  
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on  
the remote control.  
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
DIRECT  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
2
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if  
iPod USB TUNER  
XM  
SIRIUS  
HDD  
DVD  
PGM  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
THX  
ANT  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
necessary.  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
MPX  
PQLS  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
4
5
6
3
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
CATEGORY  
7
8
9
4
Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
HOME  
MENU  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
INPUT  
iPod CTRL  
the radio station.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.  
1
2
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if  
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS  
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.  
necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
Saving station presets  
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s  
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for  
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.  
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This  
receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven  
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each. When saving  
an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see page 52) is also  
stored.  
3
Tune to a station.  
There are three ways to do this:  
Automatic tuning – To search for stations in the  
currently selected band, press and hold TUNE /  
for about a second. The receiver will start searching  
for the next station, stopping when it has found one.  
Repeat to search for other stations.  
Manual tuning – To change the frequency one step  
at a time, press TUNE /.  
High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE / for  
high speed tuning. Release the button at the  
frequency you want.  
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.  
See Listening to the radio above for more on this.  
2
Press T.EDIT TUNER EDIT).  
(
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking  
memory class.  
Improving FM sound  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then  
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when  
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press  
MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode.  
This should improve the sound quality and allow you to  
enjoy the broadcast.  
press PRESET / to select the station preset you  
want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a station  
preset.  
4
Press ENTER.  
Using the noise cut mode  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
The two noise cut modes can be used when receiving AM  
broadcasts. Press MPX to select the noise cut mode (1 to  
2).  
blinking and the receiver stores the station.  
Naming station presets  
For easier identification, you can name your station  
presets.  
Using Neural THX  
®
This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX technologies  
1
Choose the station preset you want to name.  
to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.  
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.  
• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT for Neural THX listening.  
2
Press T.EDIT TUNER EDIT).  
(
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor  
at the first character position.  
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 131 for more  
on this.  
52  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
3
Input the name you want.  
Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need  
to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service.  
Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are  
provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you  
choose, there are a variety of programming packages  
available, including the option of adding “The Best of  
SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best of  
XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to  
enjoy the most popular programming among both  
services. The “Best of” packages are not available to  
SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time.  
Choose from the following characters for a name up to  
eight characters long.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]  
Use / to select a character, / to set the position,  
and ENTER to confirm your selection.  
Family friendly packages are also available to restrict  
channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for  
children.  
Tip  
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3  
To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit  
xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346);  
Canadian customers should visit xmradio.ca or call XM  
Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).  
and input eight spaces instead of a name.  
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press  
DISP when listening to a station to switch the display  
between name and frequency.  
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers  
can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit  
sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.ca (Canada).  
Listening to station presets  
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See  
Saving station presets on page 52 if you haven’t done this  
already.  
Listening to XM Radio  
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
For details on XM Radio, see About SIRIUS and XM on  
2
Press CLASS to select the class in which the station  
page 131.  
is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.  
•
Press XM to switch to the XM RADIO input.  
For best reception, you may need to move the XM Mini-  
Tuner antenna near a window (the southernmost window  
should produce the best results).  
3
Press PRESET / to select the station preset you  
want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
• If after pressing XM the display shows Check XM  
Tuner or Check Antenna, try disconnecting the  
receiver and tuner connections, and then plugging  
control to recall the station preset.  
1
them back in.  
Listening to Satellite Radio  
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to  
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either  
a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to  
your satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to  
residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii) and  
Canada.  
select channels and navigate categories using the GUI  
2
screen. The information displayed is as follows:  
Main Zone:  
Song name  
Signal strength  
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free  
music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country,  
R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus  
coverage of all the top professional and college sports  
including play by play games from select leagues and  
teams. Additional programming includes expert sports  
talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family  
programming, local traffic and weather and news from  
your most trusted sources.  
Life is Like a Wind  
Top Menu  
Preset Class : A  
Preset  
Rie fue  
Artist name  
The Blend  
Channel name  
Channel number  
A 1  
2 5  
Channel Number  
Preset Number  
Category  
Preset number  
Preset class  
Category : Hits  
Category  
Note  
1 You can check the strength of reception in Using the XM Menu (page 54).  
2 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI screens. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do  
everything if you prefer.  
53  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Sub Zone:  
Saving channel presets  
This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels, stored in  
Song name  
Life is Like a Wind  
2
seven banks, or classes (A to G) of nine channels each.  
Select the channel you want to memorize.  
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above.  
Press T.EDIT  
The display shows a blinking memory class.  
Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then  
Signal strength  
Preset class  
Preset number  
A
Rie fue  
The Blend  
1
A1  
XM25  
Hits  
Channel number  
Artist name  
Channel name  
Category  
2
.
3
press / to select the channel preset you want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.  
Selecting channels and browsing by genre  
From the XM Channel Guide, you can browse XM Radio  
channels in the order that they appear, or you can narrow  
your channel search by genre.  
• The default for all presets is XM1.  
4
Press ENTER.  
1
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
blinking and the receiver stores the XM channel.  
Life is Like a Wind  
Channel Guide  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
Preset Class : A  
Preset  
Rie fue  
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
RADIO ID  
Preview  
Highway  
America  
Hank’s Place  
Fifties (50’s)  
Sixties (60’s)  
The Blend  
Tip  
A 1  
2 5  
Channel Number  
Preset Number  
• You can also press MEMORY during reception  
display to save the information of up to five songs.  
See Using the XM Menu below to recall this  
information.  
Seventies (70’s)  
Category : Hits  
Category  
Exit  
•
Press /to enter the XM Channel Guide, navigate  
Listening to channel presets  
through the channels one at time with /, then press  
ENTER to listen to the XM radio broadcast.  
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use /  
to select a genre, then press ENTER.  
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel  
is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.  
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.  
2
Press / to select the channel preset you want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the channel preset.  
Tip  
• You can select channels directly by pressing  
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.  
Using the XM Menu  
3
The XM Menu provides additional XM Radio features.  
• You can press DISP to change XM Radio information  
in the front panel display.  
1
Press TOP MENU  
.
• The currently selected channel is automatically  
chosen (without pressing ENTER) after five seconds.  
2
Use / to select a menu item, then press ENTER  
.
Choose from the following menu items:  
• Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select  
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to  
the channel guide.  
Using XM HD Surround  
XM HD Surround uses Neural Surround™, THX  
technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from  
XM radio. XM HD Surround Sound is available on select  
XM channels only.  
®
• Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite  
and terrestrial reception.  
• Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved  
•
While listening to XM Radio, press AUTO/ALC/  
song information (see Tip on page 54).  
DIRECT for XM HD Surround listening.  
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 131 for more  
on this.  
3
When you’re finished press TOP MENU to return to  
the reception display.  
XM HD Surround can be selected also with STANDARD.  
Note  
1 Select 0 (RADIO ID) from the GUI to check the Radio ID of the XM Mini-Tuner.  
2 You can reset the Channel presets and memory in Resetting the system on page 88.  
3 You can reset the Channel Skip/Add settings in Resetting the system on page 88.  
54  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
Selecting channels and browsing by genre  
From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can browse SIRIUS  
Radio channels in the order that they appear, or you can  
narrow your channel search by genre.  
Listening to SIRIUS Radio  
For details on SIRIUS Radio, see About SIRIUS and XM on  
page 131.  
Johnny B. Goode  
Channel Guide  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
Preset  
•
Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS input.  
Chuck Berry  
Fifties (50’s)  
184 Weather  
185 TWN  
For best reception, you may need to move the  
SiriusConnect™ tuner antenna near a window (refer to  
the manual for the SiriusConnect™ Home tuner for  
186 Hardcore Sports  
187 InfoPlus  
188 RCI Plus  
A 1  
1 2 3  
Channel Number  
192 Rock Velours  
193 energie2  
Preset Number  
198 Playboy  
1
antenna placement recommendations).  
Category : Decades  
Composer : Chuck Berry  
• If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows Antenna  
Category  
Exit  
Error, try disconnecting the antenna and  
reconnecting. If the display shows Check Sirius  
Tuner, check the connection of the AC adapter and  
this receiver to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.  
•
Press / to enter the SIRIUS Channel Guide,  
2
navigate through the channels one at time with /  
then press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio  
broadcast.  
,
After connecting, you will be able to use this receiver to  
• To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY, use /  
to select a genre, then press ENTER.  
select channels and navigate categories using the GUI  
3
screen display. The information displayed is as follows:  
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.  
Main Zone:  
Preset class  
Tip  
Song name  
• You can select channels directly by pressing  
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.  
Signal strength  
Johnny B. Goode  
Top Menu  
Preset Class : A  
Preset  
• You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio  
information in the front panel display.  
Chuck Berry  
Fifties (50’s)  
Artist name  
Channel name  
• The currently selected channel is automatically  
A 1  
1 2 3  
Preset Number  
Channel Number  
chosen (without pressing ENTER) after five seconds.  
Channel number  
Category  
Category : Decades  
Composer : Chuck Berry  
Category  
Composer name  
Preset number  
Sub Zone:  
Channel name  
Song name  
Johnny B. Goode  
Chuck Berry  
Artist name  
Signal strength  
Preset class  
A
Fifties (50’s)  
Decades  
A1  
SR123  
Preset number  
Channel number  
Category  
Composer  
Chuck Berry  
Note  
1 • In order to activate your radio subscription, you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner. The SID may be found on  
a sticker located on the packaging, or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label will have a printed 12-digit SID number. When you have  
located the SID, write it down in the space provided near the end of this manual. Contact SIRIUS on the internet at: https://  
activate.siriusradio.com  
Follow the prompts to activate your subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474).  
• Select 0 (SIRIUS ID) from the on-screen display to check the Radio ID of the SiriusConnect™ tuner (see Selecting channels and browsing by  
genre on page 55).  
2 You can check the strength of reception in Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 56.  
3 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI screens. You can, however, use just the front panel display to do  
everything if you prefer.  
55  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback  
05  
• Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved  
Saving channel presets  
song information (see Tip above).  
This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels, stored in  
1
• Password Set – Set the parental lock password.  
seven banks, or classes (A to G) of nine channels each.  
3
When you’re finished press TOP MENU to return to  
1
Select the channel you want to memorize.  
the reception display.  
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre on  
page 55.  
2
Press T.EDIT  
.
The display shows a blinking memory class.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then  
press / to select the channel preset you want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.  
4
Press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
1
blinking and the receiver stores the SIRIUS channel.  
Tip  
• You can also press MEMORY during reception  
display to save the information of up to five songs.  
See Using the SIRIUS Menu below to recall this  
information.  
Listening to channel presets  
1
Press CLASS to select the class in which the channel  
is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.  
2
Press / to select the channel preset you want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the channel preset.  
Using the SIRIUS Menu  
The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS Radio  
2
features.  
1
Press TOP MENU  
.
2
Use / to select a menu item, then press ENTER  
.
Choose from the following menu items:  
• Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select  
channels you would like to remove/restore from/to  
the channel guide.  
• Parental Lock – Use / and ENTER to select  
channels you would like to place under parental lock.  
Channels put under parental lock are not displayed in  
the Channel Guide, but may be accessed by directly  
inputting their channel number and providing the  
parental lock password.  
• Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite  
and terrestrial reception.  
Note  
1 You can reset the Channel presets and memory in Resetting the system on page 88.  
2 You can reset the Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the system on page 88.  
56  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
Chapter 6:  
Listening to your system  
OPTIMUM SURR – In the Optimum Surround mode, this  
receiver automatically optimizes sound balance in each  
scene based on actually set volume. The sound balancer  
controls three major theater sound elements dialogue,  
bass and surround with original algorithm.  
Auto playback  
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this  
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option  
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically  
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects  
1
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.  
Tip  
• When an ALC is selected, the effect level can be  
adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the  
Audio options on page 82.  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
PGM  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
Listening in surround sound  
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in  
surround sound. However, the options available will  
depend on your speaker setup and the type of source  
you’re listening to.  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
RECEIVER  
/ALC/STREAM  
•
While listening to a source, Press  
press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT AUTO SURR  
DIRECT)2 for auto playback of a source.  
, then  
(
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using  
surround back channel processing on page 61.  
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before  
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the  
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see  
Standard surround sound  
The following modes provide basic surround sound for  
4
3
stereo and multichannel sources.  
how the source is being processed.  
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround  
encoded, the proper decoding format will  
automatically be selected and shows in the display.  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
PGM  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
• When listening to XM Radio, the XM HD Surround  
feature is selected automatically (see Using XM HD  
Surround on page 54 for more on this), and also when  
listening to the FM Radio, the Neural THX feature is  
selected automatically (see Using Neural THX on  
page 52 for more on this).  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
RECEIVER  
, then  
•
While listening to a source, Press  
ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver  
equalizes playback sound levels.  
press STANDARD  
(
STANDARD SURROUND).5  
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.  
Note  
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround  
sound above for more on these decoding formats).  
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.  
2 • For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 60.  
• The AUTO SURROUND mode cannot be selected in the following cases:  
– When headphones are plugged in (except ALC).  
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 82.  
3 Neural THX is selected when Neural Radio is accessed with the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input. However, Stereo is selected when a category  
other than Neural Radio is accessed.  
4 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.  
5 The STANDARD listening mode cannot be selected in the following cases:  
– When headphones are plugged in.  
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 82.  
57  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
1
Using the Home THX modes  
With two channel sources, you can select from :  
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by  
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX  
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like  
what you hear in a cinema.  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to movie sources  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
2
especially suited to music sources  
Different THX options will be available depending on the  
source and the setting for surround back channel  
processing (see Using surround back channel processing  
on page 61 for more on this).  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to video games  
• 2 Pro Logic – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound  
from the surround speakers is mono)  
HDD  
DVD  
PGM  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound, especially  
suited to movie sources  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
• Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound, especially suited  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
3
to music sources  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
• Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially  
suited to music sources  
4
REMOTE  
SETUP  
• XM HD Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
RECEIVER  
select a listening mode.6  
•
Press  
, then press THX (HOME THX) to  
5
especially suited to music sources  
With multichannel sources, if you have connected  
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you  
can select (according to format):  
With two channel sources, press THX repeatedly to select  
a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode  
(see Using surround back channel processing on page 61  
for an explanation of each process):  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available  
when you’re using two surround back speakers)  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA  
• 2 Pro Logic+THX CINEMA  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above  
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel  
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure  
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital  
Surround EX)  
• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC  
• Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES  
• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS-ES encoded sources  
7
• THX Select2 GAMES  
• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS encoded sources  
With multichannel sources, press THX  
repeatedly to select from:  
(
HOME THX  
)
8
• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1  
9
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
Note  
1 If surround back channel processing (page 61) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if  
the Surround back speaker setting on page 109 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).  
2 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH,  
DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 82 to adjust them.  
3 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio  
options on page 82).  
4 Neural THX can be selected for 2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or analog 2-channel  
sources.  
5 XM HD Surround can be selected only with the XM input.  
6 • When the function is set to TUNER, iPod/USB, PHONO, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM or SIRIUS, it is not possible to select 2 Pro Logic  
IIx GAME+THX GAMES or THX Select2 GAME.  
• The THX mode cannot be selected in the following cases:  
– When headphones are plugged in.  
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 82.  
• When playing an SACD, 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC, Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC and THX Select2 MUSIC can be selected.  
• If the settings other than Front and SW (Subwoofer) are set to NO at Speaker Setting, only THX CINEMA, THX MUSIC and THX GAMES  
can be selected.  
7 Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
8 THX CINEMA, THX MUSIC and THX GAMES can be selected when surround back processing is set to SBch OFF, when there is no surround  
back speaker, or when playing 6.1- and 7.1-channel sources.  
9 When playing DTS-encoded sources, Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA can be selected, not THX Surround EX.  
58  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA  
• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock  
and/or pop music  
1
• THX Select2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1  
• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
• EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo  
source, using all of your speakers  
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC  
1
•
THX Select2 MUSIC – This mode is suited not only  
for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS, but also  
to all multi-channel music sources (DVD-Audio, etc.).  
• PHONES SURR – When listening through  
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall  
surround.  
1
• THX Select2 GAMES – This mode is suited to  
playing the sound of games.  
Tip  
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is  
selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the  
EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on  
page 82.  
Using the Advanced surround effects  
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety  
of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced  
Surround modes are designed to be used with film  
soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music  
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks  
to see which you like.  
Listening in stereo  
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source  
through just the front left and right speakers (and  
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker  
settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
PGM  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
PGM  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
RECEIVER  
, then press ADV SURR  
ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a  
listening mode.2  
•
(
Press  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic  
soundtracks  
RECEIVER  
, then  
•
While listening to a source,Press  
• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog  
press STEREO for stereo playback.4  
• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of  
special effects  
Press repeatedly to switch between:  
• STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround  
settings and you can still use the Midnight,  
Loudness, and Tone functions.  
• MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from mono  
soundtracks  
• ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources  
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround  
Advance on page 60 for more on this.  
3
• EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo field  
• TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both  
mono and stereo TV sources  
• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround  
Advance on page 60 for more on this.  
• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games  
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs  
• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound  
Note  
1 Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
2 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup.  
For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 61.  
• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURR mode will automatically be selected.  
3 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).  
4 The STEREO mode cannot be selected in the following cases:  
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 82.  
59  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance  
Using Stream Direct  
The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to  
create natural surround sound effects using just the front  
speakers and the subwoofer.  
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the  
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary  
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the  
pure analog or digital sound source.  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
HDD  
DVD  
PGM  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
HDD  
DVD  
PGM  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
RECEIVER  
, then  
•
While listening to a source, Press  
press STEREO to select Front Stage Surround Advance  
RECEIVER  
•
While listening to a source, Press  
press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT AUTO SURR  
DIRECT) to select the mode you want.3  
, then  
/ALC/STREAM  
modes.1  
(
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on  
this.  
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel  
display to see how the source is being processed.  
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround  
sound effect directed to the center of where the front  
left and right speakers sound projection area  
converges.  
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 57.  
• ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode (page 57).  
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the  
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker  
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic  
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual  
mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and  
hi-bit/hi-sampling settings. You will hear sources  
according to the number of channels in the signal.  
• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound  
2
effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.  
FOCUS position  
(Recommended)  
WIDE position  
Frontright Front left  
speaker speaker  
Frontright  
speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
• PURE DIRECT – Analog sources are heard without  
4
any digital processing. No sound is output from the  
Speaker B in this mode.  
• OPTIMUM SURR – Listening in Optimum Surround  
mode (page 57).  
Note  
1 The Front Stage Surround Advance mode cannot be selected in the following cases:  
– When headphones are plugged in.  
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 82.  
2 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced MCACC is performed. For  
more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 42.  
3 The Stream Direct mode cannot be selected in the following cases:  
– When headphones are plugged in (except PURE DIRECT).  
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 82.  
4 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this  
is a problem.  
60  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
Using surround back channel  
06  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode  
• Default setting: OFF  
When you’re not using surround back speakers,  
processing  
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround  
back channel through your surround speakers. You can  
choose to listen to sources with no surround back  
channel information, or if the material sounds better in  
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally  
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect  
• Default setting: SBch ON  
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1  
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby  
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use  
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded  
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back  
channel will be generated, but the material may sound  
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally  
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround  
back channel processing off).  
1
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.  
RECEIVER  
, then press SBch repeatedly to  
•
Press  
cycle the virtual surround back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
• With a 7.1-channel surround system, audio signals  
that have undergone matrix decoding processing  
through surround back channel processing to which  
the Up Mix function is added are output from the  
surround back speakers.  
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used  
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)  
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is  
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for  
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is  
switched off  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
4
5
6
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
7
8
9
REMOTE  
SETUP  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
INPUT  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
RECEIVER  
, then press SBch repeatedly to  
•
Press  
cycle the surround back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
• SBch ON – Matrix decoding processing for  
generating the surround back component from the  
surround component is turned on.  
• SBch AUTO – Matrix decoding processing for  
generating the surround back component from the  
surround component is switched automatically.  
Matrix decoding processing is only performed when  
surround back channel signals are detected in the  
input signals.  
• SBch OFF – Matrix decoding processing for  
generating the surround back component from the  
surround component is turned off.  
Note  
1 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the THX, stereo, Front  
Stage Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.  
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO or if Front Bi-Amp,  
Speaker B or ZONE 2 is selected at Surr Back System.  
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.  
61  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
Setting the Up Mix function  
06  
Selecting MCACC presets  
In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround  
speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening  
position, the surround sound of 5.1-channel sources is  
heard from the side. The Up Mix function mixes the  
sound of the surround speakers with the surround back  
speakers so that the surround sound is heard from  
• Default setting: MEMORY 1  
If you have calibrated your system for different listening  
2
positions , you can switch between settings to suit the  
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting  
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a  
video game close to the TV).  
1
diagonally to the rear as it should be.  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
• Using the Up Mix function is effective when the  
speakers in the 7.1-channel surround system are set  
up as recommended in the example on page 20.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
4
5
6
REMOTE  
SETUP  
• Depending on the positions of the speakers and the  
sound source, in some cases it may not be possible  
to achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to  
OFF.  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
RECEIVER  
, then  
•
While listening to a source, Press  
Up Mix OFF  
Up Mix ON  
press MCACC  
.
3
SW  
C
SW  
C
FL  
SL  
FR  
SR  
FL  
SL  
FR  
SR  
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets .  
See Data Management on page 106 to check and  
manage your current settings.  
?
SBL  
SBR  
SBL  
SBR  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
PQLS  
HDMI  
STANDBY/ON  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
(TUNE)  
VIDEO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
MULTI-ZONE  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
(PRESET)  
ENTER  
(TUNE)  
(PRESET)  
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI  
4
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
VIDEO CAMERA  
PHONES  
HOME MENU  
RETURN  
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.  
While holding down ENTER on the front panel,  
press STANDBY/ON  
.
The display shows RESET NO .  
Use / to select UP MIX ON , and then use /  
to select ON or OFF.  
3
Press ENTER to confirm.  
• When set to ON, the UP MIX indicator on the front  
panel lights.  
Note  
1 • Set to ON regardless of this setting when playing DTS-HD signals.  
• May automatically be set to OFF even when set to ON, depending on the input signal and listening mode.  
2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.  
These presets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 42 or Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) on page 96, either of which you should have already completed.  
3 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.  
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.  
62  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
Choosing the input signal  
Better sound using Phase Control and  
Full Band Phase Control  
On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals  
1
for the different inputs as described below.  
This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions  
that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase  
Control and Full Band Phase Control. Activating Full  
Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it  
also involves the effects of Phase Control. For details on  
each of these two features, refer to the following  
explanations.  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
4
5
6
REMOTE  
SETUP  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
Using Phase Control  
RECEIVER  
, then press SIGNAL SEL to select  
During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency  
Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each  
channel are assigned to the subwoofer or the other most  
appropriate speaker. At least in theory, however, this type  
of processing involves a group delay that varies with  
frequency, resulting in phase distortion where the low-  
frequency sound is delayed or muffled by the conflict  
with other channels. With the Phase Control mode  
switched on, this receiver can reproduce powerful bass  
sound without deteriorating the quality of the original  
sound (see illustration below).  
•
Press  
the input signal corresponding to the source  
component.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
• AUTO – The receiver selects the first available signal  
in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.  
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.  
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.  
2
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.  
3
• PCM – For PCM input signals. The receiver selects  
the first available signal in the following order: HDMI;  
DIGITAL.  
Phase Control OFF  
Front speaker  
When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only selected  
DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light according to the  
signal being decoded, as follows:  
Listening  
position  
– 2 DIGITAL lights with Dolby Digital decoding.  
– 2 DIGITAL PLUS lights with Dolby Digital Plus  
decoding.  
Sound  
source  
Sound muffled due  
to a delay in time  
Subwoofer  
– 2 TrueHD lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding.  
– DTS lights with DTS decoding.  
• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear  
• Bass sound with loss of depth  
– DTS HD lights with DTS-HD decoding.  
– MSTR lights with DTS-HD Master Audio decoding.  
– 96/24 lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.  
• Sound of musical instruments with no reality  
– WMA9 Pro lights to indicate that a WMA9 Pro signal  
is being decoded.  
• HDMI is not assigned by default. To select an HDMI  
signal, conduct the input setup procedure (see The  
Input Setup menu on page 44).  
Note  
1 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96/24) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats.  
The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 Pro, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,  
DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz). With other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the  
MULTI CH IN, TUNER and PHONO).  
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital  
connections (page 32) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.  
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.  
2 When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.  
3 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.  
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.  
63  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
Phase Control ON  
Using Full Band Phase Control  
The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the  
frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers  
connected.  
Front speaker  
Listening  
position  
Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use  
generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency  
bands output from a speaker system consisting of  
multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for  
instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the  
woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and low-  
frequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers  
are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude  
characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases  
where the group delay characteristics are not effectively  
flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers  
subsequently causes group delay (the delay of low-  
frequency sound against high-frequency sound) during  
audio signal playback.  
Sound  
Original sound  
preserved with no  
loss of clarity  
source  
Subwoofer  
• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity  
• Bass sound with no loss of depth  
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality  
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound  
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an  
optimal sound image at your listening position. The  
default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase  
Control switched on for all sound sources.  
1
HDD  
DVD  
PGM  
This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals  
output from the speakers with the supplied microphone,  
therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
2
characteristics during audio signal playback – the same  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers.  
This correction minimizes group delay between the  
ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase  
characteristics across all ranges.  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
RECEIVER  
, then press PHASE CTRL (PHASE  
•
Press  
CONTROL) to select PHASE CONTROL.  
The indicator on the front panel lights.  
Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase  
characteristics between channels ensure better  
3
surround sound integration for multichannel setting.  
Note  
1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough  
together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper  
section of the diagram above), then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.  
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.  
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE  
CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also  
recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.  
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher  
value.  
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.  
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:  
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.  
– When the MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 82.  
2 To calibrate and analyze the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, either follow the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced  
MCACC (see Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 42), or set Auto MCACC menu  
under Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC to Full Band Phase Ctrl. Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC with Auto MCACC  
menu. Upon calibration of the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, the Full Band Phase Ctrl feature is automatically switched  
on. Note that FULLBAND PHASE cannot be selected unless the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers are calibrated.  
3 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed  
graphically in the GUI screen (see Using Full Band Phase Control on page 64). Also, when your PC is connected to this receiver, the original  
characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on  
your PC (see Output PC on page 106).  
64  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
HDD  
THX  
DVD  
PGM  
Full Band Phase Control OFF  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
Tweeter  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
Midrange  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
Woofer  
RECEIVER  
, then press PHASE CTRL (PHASE  
•
Press  
Group Delay Characteristics  
ms  
CONTROL) to select FULLBAND PHASE.1  
Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control  
functions are switched on. The FULL BAND and  
indicator, on the front panel lights.  
Hz  
Sound in the middle- and low-frequency ranges is  
delayed against the high-frequency sound due to group  
delay.  
Full Band Phase Control ON  
Tweeter  
Midrange  
Woofer  
Group Delay Characteristics  
ms  
Hz  
With the phase distortion corrected, the frequency-phase  
characteristics are improved across all ranges.  
• Sound with live dynamics  
• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality  
• Sound so accurately reproduced that you can even  
hear the lip movement of the singer  
• Speech heard with no loss of clarity  
• Surround sound with excellent integration  
Note  
1 The Full Band Phase Ctrl mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:  
– When headphones are plugged in.  
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.  
– When MULTI CH IN input is selected.  
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 82.  
65  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
CPhlaapteyr b7: ack with HOME MEDIA GALLERY  
inputs  
Steps to enjoy the Home Media Gallery  
Playing back audio files on the network and  
Enjoying the Home Media Gallery  
listening to Internet radio stations  
Connect to the network through LAN interface.  
This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function allows you  
to listen to audio files or listen to Internet radio stations  
on a computer or other component connected to the  
receiver’s LAN terminal. This chapter describes the  
connection, setup, and playback procedures required to  
enjoy these features. It is advisory that you also refer to  
the operation manual supplied with your network  
component.  
1
See Connecting to the network through LAN interface on  
page 67 for more on this.  
2
Configure the network settings.  
The setup is necessary only when the router to be  
connected does not have the built-in DHCP server  
function.  
See Setting up the network on page 74 for more on this.  
3
Playback with Home Media Gallery.  
Features of Home Media Gallery  
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 69 for  
more on this.  
This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you  
can enjoy the following features by connecting your  
components to these terminals.  
1
• Playback the music files stored in PCs  
You can playback a lot of music stored in your PCs  
using this unit.  
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 69  
and Playing back audio files stored on components on  
the network on page 70.  
• Listening to Internet radio stations  
You can select and listen to your favorite Internet  
radio station from the list of Internet radio stations  
created, edited, and managed by the vTuner  
database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer  
products.  
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 69  
and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 70.  
• Listening to Rhapsody, Sirius, Neural THX  
internet radio or Neural Music Direct  
See Listening to Rhapsody on page 72.  
See Listening to Sirius Internet Radio on page 72.  
See Listening to Neural Music Direct on page 72.  
Note  
1 Besides a PC, you can also play back audio files stored on your other components with the built-in media server function based on DLNA 1.0  
framework and protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio systems).  
66  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
Connecting to the network through  
LAN interface  
Introduction  
The Home Media Gallery allows you to play music on  
media servers connected on an identical Local Area  
Network (LAN) as the receiver. This unit allows for the  
playing of files stored on the following:  
Caution  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.  
• PCs running Microsoft Windows XP with Windows  
Media Connect installed  
• PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with  
Windows Media Player 11 installed  
• DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on PCs or  
other components)  
12 V  
HDMI  
TRIG  
XM  
Internet  
IN  
(OU  
12V  
TOT  
50  
OUT  
1
COAXIAL  
ASSIGNABLE  
(DVD)  
(KURO  
LINK  
To play back audio files stored on components on the  
network or listen to Internet radio stations, you must turn  
on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your  
router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it  
is necessary to set up the network manually. Otherwise,  
you cannot play back audio files stored on components  
on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. See  
Setting up the network on page 74 for more on this.  
)
IN  
1
MA  
S
OUT  
2
IN  
2
(CD)  
IR  
Modem  
BD  
IN  
IN  
1
(TV/SAT)  
IN  
2
IN  
1
(DVR)  
IN  
3
(VIDEO1)  
Router  
CON  
IN  
2
IN  
4
LAN  
3
AS
2
1
WAN  
IN  
3
ASSIGNABLE  
1
-
3
to LAN port  
OUT  
2
RS-  
LAN  
(10/100)  
OPTICAL  
LAN cable  
(sold separately)  
to LAN port  
PC1  
PC2  
By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN  
terminal, you can play back audio files stored on  
components on the network, including your PC, and  
1
listen to Internet radio stations.  
Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN  
terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP  
server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or  
higher).  
Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case  
your router does not have the built-in DHCP server  
function, it is necessary set up the network manually. For  
details, see Setting up the network on page 74.  
The specifications of a LAN terminal  
LAN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet jack  
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX  
Note  
1 • To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.  
• Photo or video files cannot be played back.  
• With Windows Media Connect or Windows Media Player 11, you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver.  
67  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
Content playable over a network  
• Even when encoded in a compatible format, some  
files may not play correctly.  
About network playback  
The network playback function of this unit uses the  
• Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.  
following technologies:  
• There are cases where you cannot listen to an  
Internet radio station even if the station can be  
selected from a list of radio stations.  
Windows Media Player  
See Windows Media Player 11/ Windows Media Connect  
on page 78 for more on this.  
• Some functions may not be supported depending on  
the server type or version used.  
Windows Media DRM  
• Supported file formats vary by server. As such, files  
not supported by your server are not displayed on this  
unit. For more information check with the  
manufacturer of your server.  
Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights Management  
(WMDRM) is a platform to protect and securely deliver  
content for playback on computers, portable devices and  
network devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a  
WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM protected  
content can only be played on media servers supporting  
WMDRM.  
About playback behavior over a network  
• Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any  
media files stored on it are deleted while playing  
content.  
Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual  
property, including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to  
access WMDRM protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to  
protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the  
software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content.  
Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download  
licenses for protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a  
revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to  
upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade,  
you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade.  
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of  
Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this  
product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.  
• If there are problems within the network environment  
(heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be  
displayed or played properly (playback may be  
interrupted or stalled). For best performance, a  
100BASE-TX connection between player and PC is  
recommended.  
• If several clients are playing simultaneously, as the  
case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.  
• Depending on the security software installed on a  
connected PC and the setting of such software,  
network connection may be blocked.  
DLNA  
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the  
player and/or the Home Media Gallery features due to  
communication error/malfunctions associated with your  
network connection and/or your PC, or other connected  
equipment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or  
Internet service provider.  
“Windows Media™” is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.  
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and  
cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft  
Licensing, Inc.  
DLNA CERTIFIED™ Audio Player  
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-  
industry organization of consumer electronics,  
computing industry and mobile device companies.  
Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of  
digital media through a wired or wireless network in the  
home.  
®
®
®
®
Microsoft , Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 2000,  
®
®
®
Windows Millennium Edition, Windows 98, and WindowsNT are  
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in  
the United States and/or other countries.  
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find  
products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability  
Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability  
Guidelines v1.0.  
Authorizing this receiver  
In order to be able to play with Home Media Gallery, this  
receiver must be authorized. This happens automatically  
when the receiver makes a connection over the network  
to the PC. If not, please authorize this receiver manually  
on the PC. The authorization (or permission) method for  
access varies depending on the type of server currently  
being connected. For more information on authorizing  
this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your  
server.  
When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA  
compatible device is connected to this player, some  
setting changes of software or other devices may be  
required. Please refer to the operating instructions for  
the software or device for more information.  
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of  
Digital Living Network Alliance.  
68  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
• Rhapsody – Rhapsody music broadcast service  
• Sirius – Internet radio that supports Sirius  
Playback with Home Media Gallery  
• Neural Music Direct – Internet radio that supports  
Neural Surround  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
HDMI  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
• Server Name – Server components on the network  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
• Favorites – Favorite songs currently being registered  
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
• Recently played – Internet Radio listening history  
(most recent 20 incidents)  
CATEGORY  
HOME  
MENU  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
iPod CTRL  
Depending on the selected category, the names of  
1
2
3
folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.  
Important  
3
Use / to select the folder, music files or Internet  
• When you play back audio files, ‘Connecting...’ is  
displayed before playback starts. The display may  
continue for several seconds depending on the type  
of file.  
radio station to play back, and then press ENTER  
.
Press / to scroll up and down the list and select the  
desired item. When you press ENTER, playback starts  
with the playback screen being displayed for the selected  
1
• In case a domain is configured in a Windows network  
environment, you cannot access a PC on the network  
while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of  
logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.  
item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN.  
• In case of a server  
Top Menu  
******  
A/V RECEIVER  
Folder1  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Music1  
Music2  
Music3  
Music4  
Music5  
4 / 8  
• There are cases where the time elapsed may not be  
correctly displayed.  
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to select Home  
Media Gallery as the input function.  
It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the  
network. The following screen appears when the Home  
Media Gallery is selected as the input function. The  
number next to indicates the number of connected  
servers.  
Return  
Track Title  
Top Menu  
PLAY  
3:02  
-2:02  
Random On  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
Main Zone:  
Server  
Top Menu  
A/V RECEIVER  
Now Playing  
1
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Internet Radio  
Rhapsody  
Sirius  
Return  
Neural Music Direct  
******  
Favorites  
Recently Played  
Setup  
• In case of Internet radio  
1/8  
Internet Radio  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
Folder1  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Folder4  
Music1  
Music2  
Music3  
Music4  
5 / 32  
Sub Zone:  
TOP MENU  
[ Internet Radio  
[ Rhapsody  
[ Sirius  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Return  
[ Neural Music Direct  
[ ******  
[ Favorites  
[ Recently Played  
[ Setup  
1/8  
Track Title  
Top Menu  
PLAY  
3:02  
-2:02  
Random On  
Artist Name  
Channel Name  
The server without the mark cannot be accessed.  
Use / to select the category you want to play  
2
Internet Radio  
Now Playing  
back, and then press ENTER  
.
Select a category from the following list:  
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Return  
• Internet Radio – Internet radio  
Note  
1 When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10  
seconds while the list screen is displayed.  
69  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
Only audio files with the mark can be played. In case of  
the folders with the mark, use / and ENTER to  
select the desired folder and audio files.  
Button  
Function  
/  
Press to skip to previous/next song.  
Press repeatedly to switch among Repeat One,  
Repeat All and Repeat Off (available only during  
playback).  
4
Repeat step 3 to play back the desired song.  
For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section  
shown below.  
Press repeatedly to switch between Random On  
and Random Off (available only during playback).  
• Internet radio stations – See Listening to Internet  
radio stations below.  
/  
When browsing, press to move to previous/next  
levels.  
• Rhapsody – See Listening to Rhapsody on page 72.  
DISP  
Press repeatedly to change the song playback  
information displayed in the front panel display. (If  
the list screen is displayed, switch to the playback  
screen.)  
• Sirius – See Listening to Sirius Internet Radio on  
page 72.  
• Neural Music Direct – See Listening to Neural Music  
Direct on page 72.  
ENTER  
When browsing, press to move to next levels.  
During playback, press to set the play and pause  
modes.  
• Server – See Playing back audio files stored on  
components on the network below.  
TOP MENU Press to return to the Top Menu screen.  
RETURN Press to return to the previous level.  
Playing back audio files stored on  
components on the network  
Listening to Internet radio stations  
About the playback screen  
The following screen appears when you play back audio  
files. Note that some items may not be displayed  
depending on the type of file.  
About Internet radio  
Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service  
transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of  
Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services  
from every corner of the world. Some are hosted,  
managed, and broadcast by private individuals while  
others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial  
radio stations or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or  
OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically  
restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a  
transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are  
accessible from anywhere in the world, as long as there  
is a connection to the Internet, as services are not  
transmitted through the air but are delivered over the  
World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet  
radio stations by genre as well as by region.  
Main Zone:  
Track Title  
Track title  
Play mode  
Artist name or File name  
Top Menu  
PLAY  
3:02  
-2:02  
Random On  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
Album title  
Server  
Now Playing  
Playing time  
File information  
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Return  
Sub Zone:  
Play  
Track Title  
Track title  
Random On  
-2:02  
Play mode  
Playing time  
About the playback screen  
The following screen appears when audio streams from  
an Internet radio station are received.  
3:02  
Artist name or File name  
Artist Name  
Album Title  
Album title  
Main Zone:  
You can perform the following operations with the remote  
control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not  
available for operation depending on the category  
currently being played back.  
Track title  
Play mode  
Artist name  
Channel name  
Track Title  
Top Menu  
PLAY  
3:02  
-2:02  
Random On  
Artist Name  
Channel Name  
Button  
Function  
Internet Radio  
Now Playing  
Press to start playback.  
Playing time  
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx  
Buffer : xxxxxxxxxxx  
If you start playback when something other than a  
song is selected, all the songs that fall into that  
category will play.  
File information  
Return  
Pauses playback.  
Stops playback.  
70  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
Sub Zone:  
3
Use / to select ‘Get access code’, then press  
ENTER  
.
Play  
The access code required for registration on the special  
Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Make a memo of  
this address.  
Track Title  
Track title  
Play mode  
Playing time  
Random On  
-2:02  
3:02  
Help  
Get access code  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
Top Menu  
Artist name  
A/V RECEIVER  
Artist Name  
Registration help  
access code  
ABC1234  
Channel Name  
Channel name  
Get access code  
Show Your WebID/PW  
Reset Your WebID/PW  
FAQ  
About list of Internet radio  
2 / 5  
1 / 2  
The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is  
created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database  
service exclusively for use with this receiver. For details  
about vTuner, see vTuner on page 77.  
Return  
Return  
The following can be checked on the Help screen:  
• Get access code – The access code required for  
registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site  
is displayed.  
Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations  
You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio  
stations. See Advanced operations for Internet radio on  
• Show Your WebID/PW – After registering on the  
special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID  
and password are displayed.  
1
page 74 for more on this.  
• Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the information  
registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site.  
When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are  
also cleared. If you want to listen to the same  
stations, re-register after resetting.  
Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner  
list from the special Pioneer site  
With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the  
list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and  
played. Check the access code required for registration  
on the receiver, use this access code to access the  
special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the  
desired broadcast stations in your favorites. The address  
of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is:  
4
Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from  
your computer and perform the registration process.  
http://www.radio-pioneer.com  
Access the above site and use the access code in step 3  
to perform user registration, following the instructions on  
the screen.  
http://www.radio-pioneer.com  
1
Display the Internet Radio list screen.  
To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform steps 1  
to 2 at Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 69.  
5
Register the desired broadcast stations as your  
favorites, following the instructions on the computer’s  
screen.  
Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and  
stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case  
they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast  
stations and can be played.  
2
Use / to select ‘Help’, then press ENTER.  
Internet Radio  
Top Menu  
A/V RECEIVER  
Folder25  
Folder26  
Folder27  
Folder28  
Folder29  
Folder30  
Folder31  
Help  
32/32  
Return  
Note  
1 • To listen to Internet radio stations, you must have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not enjoy  
the full benefits of Internet radio.  
• The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.  
• A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons.  
• Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a radio station selected  
from the list of Internet radio stations.  
71  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
Listening to Rhapsody  
Playing back your favorite songs  
About Rhapsody  
About the Favorites folder  
Rhapsody is a paid digital music broadcast service  
provided by RealNetworks. Rhapsody offers 30-day free  
trial. Access the website in order to set up a trial account:  
http://www.rhapsody.com/pioneer  
You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs or Internet  
radio stations in the Favorites folder. Note that only the  
audio files stored on components on the network can be  
registered.  
• You must have a registered account in order to listen  
to songs using Rhapsody. For details, see Checking  
about the Accounts on page 76.  
Registering and deleting audio files and Internet  
radio stations in and from the Favorites folder  
Press PGM while a song is being played back or stopped.  
The selected song is then registered in the Favorites  
folder.  
• As of April 2009, the Rhapsody service is only offered  
in the United States.  
• Some functions may be changed at Rhapsody’s  
discretion.  
Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be  
registered.  
Listening to Sirius Internet Radio  
Check the website below to listen to Sirius Internet Radio:  
http://www.sirius.com/siriusinternetradio  
To delete a registered song, select the Favorites folder,  
select the song you want to delete from the folder, and  
press CLR. The selected song is then deleted from the  
Favorites folder.  
• You must have a registered account in order to listen  
to songs using Sirius Internet Radio. For details, see  
Checking about the Accounts on page 76.  
• Some functions may be changed at Sirius’s  
discretion.  
Listening to Neural Music Direct  
About Neural Music Direct  
Neural Music Direct is an Internet radio station managed  
and operated by Neural THX. Neural radio stations deliver  
multichannel surround sound. The Neural-THX Surround  
mode is automatically selected and lets you enjoy a rich  
multichannel surround sound experience. For details  
about Neural THX, see the operation manual supplied  
separately.  
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation,  
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some  
jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
72  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
About playable file formats  
The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not  
available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats varies depending  
on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server.  
Music files  
Category Extension  
Stream  
a
.mp3  
MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
MP3  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
8 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
8 kHz to 44.1 kHz  
16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit  
2 ch  
VBR/CBR  
b
LPCM  
WAV  
WMA  
LPCM  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
—
.wav  
LPCM  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
8 kHz to 44.1 kHz  
16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit  
2 ch  
.wma  
WMA2/7/8  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
5 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
VBR/CBR  
WMA9  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
5 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
32 kHz to 48 kHz  
16 bit  
VBR/CBR  
AAC  
.m4a  
.aac  
.3gp  
.3g2  
MPEG-4 AAC LC  
Sampling frequency  
Quantization bitrate  
Channel  
MPEG-4 HE AAC  
(aacPlus v1/2)  
2 ch  
Bitrate  
16 kbps to 320 kbps  
Supported/Supported  
VBR/CBR  
FLAC  
.flac  
FLAC  
Sampling frequency  
8 kHz, 16 kHz, 22 kHz,  
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
Quantization bitrate  
8 bit, 16 bit  
Channel  
2 ch (8-bit monaural audio  
is not supported)  
Bitrate  
—
VBR/CBR  
Not supported/Supported  
a.“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”  
b.Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.  
73  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
Advanced operations for Internet radio Setting up the network  
In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this  
receiver is a broadband router (with the built-in DHCP  
server function), simply turn on the DHCP server  
function, and you will not need to set up the network  
manually. You must set up the network as described  
below only when you have connected this receiver to a  
server without the DHCP server function. Before you set  
up the network, consult with your ISP or the network  
manager for the required settings. It is advisory that you  
also refer to the operation manual supplied with your  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
4
5
6
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
/CLR  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
0
MASTER  
VOLUME  
INPUT  
CATEGORY  
HOME  
MENU  
TV CONTROL  
iPod CTRL  
CH  
VOL  
Saving Internet radio stations  
1
network component.  
This receiver can remember the Internet radio stations  
that you often listen to in seven classes (A to G) with up  
to nine stations in each class to make the total of 63  
stations at its maximum capacity.  
IP Address  
The IP address to be entered must be defined within the  
following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the  
following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored  
on components on the network or listen to Internet radio  
stations.  
Before proceeding with the following steps, check  
whether you have followed Steps 1 to 3 on page 69.  
Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254  
1
Tune into the Internet radio station that you want  
Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254  
Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254  
to save.  
Tune into the desired Internet radio station by following  
Steps 1 to 3 on page 69.  
Subnet Mask  
In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly  
connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask  
provided by your ISP on paper. In most of the cases, enter  
255.255.255.0.  
2
Press T.EDIT to switch to the station-saving mode.  
3
Press CLASS to select the class that you want to  
save the station in.  
Select the desired class from A to G.  
Gateway IP  
In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver,  
enter the corresponding IP address.  
4
Use / to select the number that you want to  
save the station as, and then press ENTER.  
You can also select the station number by using the  
number buttons. Select the desired number from 1 to 9.  
DNS Server Preferred/DNS Server Alternate  
In case there is only one DNS server address provided by  
your ISP on paper, enter ‘DNS Server Preferred’. In case  
there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter  
‘DNS Server Alternate’ in the other DNS server address  
field.  
Retrieving saved Internet radio stations  
You need to save Internet radio stations first before  
retrieving them. If there are no Internet radio stations  
currently being saved, see Saving Internet radio stations  
above and save at least one Internet radio station before  
proceeding with the following steps.  
Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port  
This setting is required when you connect this receiver to  
the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address of  
your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also,  
enter the port number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy  
Port’ field.  
1
Select the class that you want to retrieve an  
Internet radio station from.  
Each time you press CLASS, the class switches to A to G  
in turn.  
2
Use / to select the station number that you  
want to retrieve.  
You can also select the station number by using the  
number buttons.  
‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select an Internet  
radio station currently not being saved.  
Note  
1 In case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corresponding changes to the network  
settings of this receiver.  
74  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
The Network IP Settings screen appears.  
Select ‘Static IP Address’ and press ENTER to  
Tip  
5
• Press / or the numeric buttons to enter  
alphanumeric characters. To delete alphanumeric  
characters entered one at a time, press or  
CLEAR. ‘Cancel Key Editing Lose Changes?’  
appears when you press RETURN or while the  
cursor is placed in the leftmost position on the  
alphanumeric character entry screen. In this case,  
press ENTER to cancel the editing screen, RETURN  
to return to the editing screen.  
confirm your selection.  
The IP address screen appears. When you select  
‘Automatic (DHCP)’, the network is automatically set up,  
and you do not need to follow Steps 6 to 7. Proceed with  
Step 8.  
Network IP Settings  
Top Menu  
A/V RECEIVER  
Automatic (DHCP)  
Static IP Address  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
TV  
CD  
CD-R  
XM  
2 / 2  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
Return  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
6
Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your  
1
2
3
PRESET  
ENTER  
PRESET  
RETURN  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
selection.  
The Edit IP address screen appears.  
4
5
6
CATEGORY  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
HOME  
MENU  
TUNE  
7
8
9
iPod CTRL  
IP address  
Edit IP address  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
Top Menu  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
A/V RECEIVER  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
192.168.000.002  
Change  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
MASTER  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 0 0 0 . 0 0 2  
1
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to select ‘Home  
Media Gallery’ as the input function.  
2 / 2  
It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the  
network. The following screen appears when the Home  
Media Gallery is selected as the input function.  
Return  
Return  
7
Enter the IP address.  
Press / to select a number and / to move the  
cursor. After you select the last number, press or  
ENTER. You can also use the numeric buttons to enter a  
number. The Enable Proxy Server screen appears.  
Top Menu  
A/V RECEIVER  
1
Internet Radio  
Rhapsody  
Sirius  
Neural Music Direct  
******  
Favorites  
Recently Played  
Setup  
1/8  
8
Select ‘No’ or ‘Yes’ for the proxy server setting to  
deactivate or activate the proxy server.  
In case you select ‘No’, proceed with Step 13. In case you  
select ‘Yes’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 9. The  
Proxy Hostname screen appears.  
2
Select ‘SETUP’ and press ENTER to confirm your  
selection.  
The SETUP screen appears.  
Enable Proxy Server  
Top Menu  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
A/V RECEIVER  
Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
No  
Yes  
Top Menu  
1
Information  
Network Setup  
Accounts  
Internet Radio  
Rhapsody  
Sirius  
Neural Music Direct  
******  
Favorites  
1 / 2  
Recently Played  
Setup  
8/8  
1 / 3  
Return  
Return  
9
Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your  
selection.  
3
Select ‘Network Setup’ and press ENTER to confirm  
The Edit Proxy Hostname screen appears.  
your selection.  
The Network Setup screen appears.  
Proxy Hostname  
A/V RECEIVER  
Edit Proxy Hostname  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
Top Menu  
4
Either ‘Network Found’ or ‘No Network Found  
appears. Check the network connection status and  
press ENTER  
’
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv  
Change  
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v  
.
• Network Found – Connected to a component on the  
2 / 2  
network.  
Return  
Return  
• No Network Found – Not connected to a  
component on the network.  
75  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
10 Enter the address of your proxy server or the  
domain name.  
After entry, press or ENTER. The Proxy Port screen  
appears.  
2
Check the network settings.  
Press / to switch the display. Each time you press /  
, the display switches as follows.  
Firmware Version MAC Address   
IP address Subnet Mask Gateway IP   
Proxy Server  
11 Select ‘Change’ and press ENTER to confirm your  
selection.  
The Edit Proxy Port screen appears.  
3
Press RETURN.  
The Setup screen appears. To return to the Top Menu  
screen, press RETURN again.  
Proxy Port  
A/V RECEIVER  
Edit Proxy Port  
A/V RECEIVER  
Top Menu  
Top Menu  
11111  
Change  
11111  
Checking about the Accounts  
Screen concerning Rhapsody or Sirius Internet Radio  
account registration.  
2 / 2  
Return  
Return  
Before proceeding with the following steps, check  
whether you have followed Steps from 1 to 2 on page 75.  
12 Enter the port number of your proxy server.  
Use the numeric buttons to enter the port number. After  
entry, press or ENTER. The Settings OK? screen  
appears.  
1
Select Accounts and press ENTER to confirm your  
selection.  
2
Select Rhapsody or Sirius and press ENTER 1  
.
13 Press ENTER to complete the network setup  
procedure.  
The Top Menu screen appears.  
The contents below can be checked when Rhapsody is  
selected.  
• Sign in to Rhapsody (Set Account)  
14 Switch off the receiver.  
Use RECEIVER to switch off.  
• Account Info  
The contents below can be checked when Sirius is  
selected.  
Checking the network settings  
• Set Account  
You can check the following network settings of this  
receiver: the MAC address, the IP address, the gateway  
IP address, the proxy server, the Subnet mask, and the  
firmware version (for the Home Media Gallery of this  
receiver).  
When disposing of the product, we recommend you reset  
it to delete the data. See Resetting the system on page 88.  
Software update  
Information on software updates may be posted on the  
Pioneer website.  
Before proceeding with the following steps, check  
whether you have followed Steps from 1 to 2 on page 75.  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com  
1
Select ‘Information’ and press ENTER to confirm  
your selection.  
The Firmware Version (for the Home Media Gallery of  
this receiver) screen appears.  
Firmware Version  
Top Menu  
A/V RECEIVER  
X.X.XX.XXX  
1 / 6  
Return  
(The version of the illustration is not the latest.)  
Note  
1 Some operating procedures, etc., may be changed at the discretion of Rhapsody and Sirius.  
76  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
Ethernet  
A frame-based computer networking technology for local  
area networks (LANs). This player supports 100BASE-TX  
Glossary  
and 10BASE-T.  
aacPlus  
AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding  
Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com)  
FLAC  
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio format  
allows lossless codec. Audio is compressed in FLAC  
without any loss in quality. For more details about FLAC,  
visit the following website: http://flac.sourceforge.net/  
IP (Internet Protocol) address  
A unique number that devices use in order to identify and  
communicate with each other on a network utilizing the  
Internet Protocol standard, such as ‘192.168.0.1’. No  
duplicate numbers are allowed in the network.  
Default Gateway  
Default Gateway is a node on a computer network that  
serves as an access point to another network. A default  
gateway (such as a computer and router) is used to  
forward all traffic that is not addressed to a station within  
the local subnet.  
LAN  
LAN is an abbreviation for the Local Area Network, which  
is a computer network covering a small geographical  
area, like a home, office, or group of buildings. Current  
LANs are most likely to be based on switched IEEE 802.3  
Ethernet technology, running at 10, 100, or 1000 Mbit/s,  
or on IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi technology.  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)  
Server  
A DHCP server is a server that allocates IP addresses to  
hosts (network devices). In most cases, a broadband  
router serves as a DHCP server in a home network.  
MAC (Media Access Control) address  
DLNA  
An address attached to the port of any network device  
with an IP address. The MAC address is expressed as  
“00:e0:36:xx:xx:xx” and cannot be changed.  
The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers  
to recognize products that meet the new standard for  
home network PCs and other digital devices, as set down  
in the DLNA Guidelines for interoperability. This allows  
music, video, etc. to be enjoyed from various devices over  
a home network. This unit is compatible with music,  
photo and video content, and is based on the DLNA  
Home Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines v1.0.  
This unit can be used to playback music, photos and  
video stored on a DLNA-compatible server connected  
through a LAN cable.  
Neural Surround  
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in  
surround technology and has been adopted by XM  
Satellite Radio, FM Radio and Neural Music Direct for  
broadcasts of surround recordings and live events.  
Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency  
domain processing which allows delivery of a more  
detailed sound stage with superior localization of  
surround elements. System playback is scalable from  
stereo up to state-of-the-art multichannel surround.  
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is dedicated to  
the simplified sharing of digital content, such as digital  
music, photos and video among networked consumer  
electronics (CE) and PCs. By establishing a platform of  
interoperability based on open industry standards, DLNA  
delivers technical design guidelines that companies can  
use to develop digital home products that share content  
through wired or wireless networks in the home.  
Subnet mask  
The IP address is divided into the network address part  
and the host address part. The subnet mask is expressed  
as ‘255.255.255.0’. In most cases, the subnet mask is  
automatically assigned by the DHCP server.  
DNS  
vTuner  
DNS is an abbreviation for the Domain Name System,  
which stores and associates many types of information  
with domain names. Most importantly, DNS translates  
domain names (computer hostnames or sitenames,  
such as www.pioneerelectronics.com) to IP addresses  
(such as 202.221.192.106).  
vTuner is a paid online database service that allows you  
to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet.  
vTuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different  
countries around the globe. For more detail about  
vTuner, visit the following website:  
http://www.radio-pioneer.com  
77  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs  
07  
“This product is protected by certain intellectual property  
rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such  
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a  
license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized  
subsidiary.”  
Windows Media  
Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media  
creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows.  
Windows Media is either a registered trademark or  
trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or  
other countries. Use an application licensed by Microsoft  
Corporation to author, distribute, or play Windows Media  
formatted content. Using an application unauthorized by  
Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction.  
Windows Media DRM  
Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights  
Management) service for the Windows Media platform. It  
is designed to provide secure delivery of audio and/or  
video content over an IP network to a PC or other  
playback device in such a way that the distributor can  
control how that content is used. The WMDRM-protected  
content can only be played back on a component  
supporting the WMDRM service.  
Windows Media Player 11/  
Windows Media Connect  
Windows Media Connect is software to deliver music,  
photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows XP  
computer to home stereo systems and TVs.  
With this software, you can play back files stored on the  
PC through various devices wherever you like in your  
home.  
At this time you cannot download the Windows Media  
Connect software from Microsoft’s website. If your server  
currently does not have Windows Media Connect  
installed, install Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows  
XP) instead. This software can be downloaded from  
Microsoft’s website.  
For more information check the official Microsoft  
website.  
78  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KURO LINK  
08  
Chapter 8:  
KURO LINK  
Synchronized operation with a KURO LINK-compatible  
Pioneer flat panel TV or Blu-ray disc player or with a  
component of another make that supports the KURO  
LINK function is possible when the component is  
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable.  
• To use the KURO LINK function, connect this  
receiver and flat panel TV using the HDMI OUT 1  
terminal. Connecting the KURO LINK compatible  
component using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal may  
result in malfunction. If this happens, turn off the  
KURO LINK compatible component’s KURO LINK  
setting.  
For details about concrete operations, settings, etc., refer  
to the operating instructions for each component.  
• While the receiver is equipped with four HDMI inputs,  
the KURO LINK function can only be used with up to  
three DVD or Blu-ray disc players or up to three DVD  
or Blu-ray disc recorders.  
• You cannot use this function with components that  
do not support KURO LINK.  
• We do not guarantee this receiver will work with  
Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible components or  
components of other makes that support the KURO  
LINK function. We do not guarantee that all  
synchronized operations will work with components  
of other makes that support the KURO LINK function.  
Cautions on the KURO LINK function  
• Connect the TV directly to this receiver. Interrupting a  
direct connection with other amps or an AV converter  
(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational  
errors.  
• Use a High Speed HDMI™ cable when you want to  
use the KURO LINK function. The KURO LINK  
function may not work properly if a different type of  
HDMI cable is used.  
• Only connect components (Blu-ray disc player, etc.)  
you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of  
this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with  
other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI  
switch) can cause operational errors.  
Making the KURO LINK connections  
• When KURO LINK is set to ON, HDMI Input is  
automatically set to OFF.  
You can use synchronized operation for a connected flat  
panel TV and up to four other components.  
• If a listening mode other than AUTO SURROUND,  
ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT, OPTIMUM  
SURROUND or STEREO is selected while the PQLS  
effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is disabled.  
Be sure to connect the flat panel TV’s audio cable to the  
audio input of this unit.  
For details, see Connecting your TV and playback  
components on page 26.  
• When this receiver is connected by HDMI cable to a  
Pioneer player that is compatible with the PQLS  
function via HDMI connection and HDMI  
reauthentication is performed (the HDMI indicator  
blinks), the PQLS effect is enabled and the listening  
mode is set to AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode  
other than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT, PURE  
DIRECT, OPTIMUM SURROUND or STEREO is  
selected.  
Important  
• When connecting this system or changing  
connections, be sure to switch the power off and  
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.  
After completing all connections, connect the power  
cords to the wall socket.  
• After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2  
second to 10 second HDMI initialization process  
begins. You cannot carry out any operations during  
initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit  
blinks during initialization, and you can turn this  
receiver on once it has stopped blinking.  
• When the receiver’s KURO LINK is turned ON, even  
if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is  
possible to output the audio and video signals from a  
player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound  
from the receiver, but only when a KURO LINK-  
compatible component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.) and  
compatible TV are connected. In this case, the  
receiver’s power turns on and the power and HDMI  
indicators light.  
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend  
that you connect your HDMI component not to a flat  
panel TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on  
this receiver.  
79  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KURO LINK  
08  
About connections with a product of a  
different brand that supports the KURO LINK  
function  
The synchronized operations below can be used when  
the receiver’s KURO LINK function is connected to a TV  
of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the KURO  
LINK function. (Depending on the TV, however, some of  
the KURO LINK functions may not work.)  
KURO LINK Setup  
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as  
KURO LINK-compatible connected components in order to  
make use of the KURO LINK function. For more information  
see the operating instructions for each component.  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
PARAMETER  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
• You can set whether to output the sound over the  
speakers connected to the receiver or over the TV’s  
speakers using the TV’s menu screen.  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
HDMI  
RECEIVER  
ZONE  
.
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
CATEGORY  
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
HOME  
MENU  
ZONE  
2
3
• You can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the  
sound using the TV’s remote control.  
MAIN  
iPod CTRL  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s  
power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for  
a component connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching the TV)  
RECEIVER  
, then press HOME MENU  
1
2
3
Press  
Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER  
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER  
.
.
• The sound of TV programs or an external input  
connected to the TV can also be output from the  
speakers connected to the receiver. (This requires  
connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in addition  
to the HDMI cable.)  
4d.Other Setup  
4d1.KURO LINK Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
KURO LINK  
:
:
ON  
Display Power Off  
YES  
The synchronized operations below can be used when  
the receiver’s KURO LINK function is connected to a  
player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that  
supports the KURO LINK function.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
4
Select the ‘KURO LINK’ setting you want.  
Choose whether to set this unit’s KURO LINK function  
ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the KURO  
LINK function.  
• When playback starts on the player or recorder, the  
receiver’s input switches to the HDMI input to which  
that component is connected.  
When using a component that does not support the  
KURO LINK function, set this to OFF.  
See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the  
models of non-Pioneer brands and products that support  
the KURO LINK function.  
• ON – Enables the KURO LINK function.  
• OFF – The KURO LINK is disabled. Synchronized  
operations cannot be used.  
5
Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting you want.  
If the TV’s power is turned off while using the KURO LINK  
function, the receiver’s power is also turned off (all power  
off function). This function can be disabled.  
• YES – The all power off function is enabled. The  
receiver’s power turns off together with the TV’s power.  
This function only works when the input for a  
component connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching the TV.  
• NO – The all power off function is disabled. The  
receiver’s power is not affected when the TV’s power  
is turned off.  
6
When you’re finished, press HOME MENU  
.
You will finish to HOME MENU.  
80  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
KURO LINK  
08  
Setting the PQLS function  
Synchronized amp mode  
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio  
signal transfer control technology using the KURO LINK  
function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by  
controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS  
compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that  
has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is  
generated upon transmission.  
The synchronized amp mode can be set from the KURO  
LINK-compatible TV’s remote control. See the  
explanation below for operations in the synchronized  
amp mode.  
These functions are set from the TV’s menu screen. For  
more information, refer to the operating instructions of  
the KURO LINK-compatible TV.  
• On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround,  
PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio  
output to Linear PCM.  
Synchronized amp mode operations  
When using the synchronized amp mode, the KURO  
LINK-compatible component connected to the receiver  
operates in sync as described below.  
• On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio, PQLS  
only works when playing CDs.  
• The receiver’s volume can be set and the sound can  
be muted using the TV’s remote control.  
Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with  
your player for more information.  
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the receiver’s  
power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for  
a component connected to the receiver by HDMI  
connection is selected or when watching the TV)  
This function is activated when KURO LINK is set to ON.  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the  
KURO LINK-compatible component is played.  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
• The receiver’s input switches automatically when the  
TV’s channel is switched.  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
• The synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if  
the receiver’s input is switched to a component other  
than one connected by HDMI.  
1
Set the remote control to the receiver operation  
mode, then press PQLS to select PQLS setting.  
The setting is displayed on the front panel display.  
The operations below can also be used on Pioneer KURO  
LINK-compatible flat panel TVs.  
• PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision quartz  
controller in this receiver eliminates distortion  
caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best  
possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use  
the HDMI interface. This is valid as an HDMI function  
for PQLS-compatible players.  
• When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the sound  
is muted, the volume status is displayed on the flat  
panel TV’s screen.  
• When the OSD language is switched on the flat panel  
TV, the receiver’s language setting also switches  
accordingly.  
• PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.  
Canceling synchronized amp mode  
• When the synchronized amp mode is canceled, the  
receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an  
HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.  
Before using synchronization  
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you  
must:  
1
Put all components into standby mode.  
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the  
synchronized amp mode is canceled when the  
receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the  
synchronized amp mode back on, select the  
synchronized amp mode using the TV’s remote  
control.  
2
Turn the power on for all components, with the  
power for the flat panel TV being turned on last.  
3
Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is  
connected to this receiver, and see if video output from  
connected components displays properly on the screen  
or not.  
• When in the synchronized amp mode, the  
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation  
that produces sound from the TV is performed from  
the TV’s menu screen, if the receiver’s HDMI output  
setting is changed, etc.  
4
Check whether the components connected to all  
HDMI inputs are properly displayed.  
81  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
09  
Chapter 9:  
Using other functions  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
BYPASS  
ON  
b
Setting the Audio options  
Applies the treble and bass tone  
controls to a source, or bypasses  
them completely.  
TONE  
(Tone  
Control)  
There are a number of additional sound settings you can  
make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The  
defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.  
c
Adjusts the amount of bass.  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
Default: 0 (dB)  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
Default: 0 (dB)  
BASS  
c
Adjusts the amount of treble.  
Important  
TREBLE  
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO  
PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the  
current source, settings and status of the receiver.  
d
S.RTRV  
(Sound  
With the Sound Retriever  
function, DSP processing is used  
OFF  
ON  
Retriever) to compensate for the loss of  
audio data upon compression,  
improving the sound’s sense of  
density and modulation.  
RECEIVER  
, then press AUDIO PARAMETER.  
1
2
Press  
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.  
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,  
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the  
table below for notes on this.  
DNR  
(Digital  
Noise  
May improve the quality of sound  
in a noisy source (for example,  
video tape with lots of background  
OFF  
ON  
Reduction) noise) when switched on.  
3
Use / to set it as necessary.  
DIALOG E. Localizes dialog in the center  
OFF  
See the table below for the options available for each  
setting.  
(Dialog  
channel to make it stand out from  
ON  
Enhancem other background sounds in a TV  
ent)  
or movie soundtrack.  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.  
Creates a wider dynamic range with  
digital sources like CDs or DVDs  
(Smoother, more delicate musical  
expression can be achieved by  
requantizing 16 bit PCM or 20 bit  
compressed audio signals to 24 bits)  
OFF  
HIBITSMP  
(High Bit/  
High  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
ON  
MCACC  
(MCACC  
preset)  
Selects your favorite MCACC  
preset memory when multiple  
preset memoriesare saved. When M6. MEMORY  
an MCACC preset memory has  
been renamed, the given name is  
displayed.  
M1. MEMORY  
1 to  
Sampling)  
6
Default:  
M1.  
MEMORY 1  
DUAL  
(Dual  
Mono)  
Specifies how dual mono  
encoded Dolby Digital  
soundtracks should be played.  
Dual mono is not widely used, but  
is sometimes necessary when  
two languages need to be sent to  
separate channels.  
CH1–Channel  
1 is heard only  
CH2–Channel  
2 is heard only  
EQ  
Switches on/off the effects of EQ  
Pro.  
ON  
(Acoustic  
Calibration  
EQ)  
a
CH1 CH2 –  
Both channels  
heard from  
OFF  
S-WAVE  
Switches on/off the effects of  
ON  
front speakers  
(Standing Standing Wave Control.  
Wave)  
e
OFF  
DRC  
Adjusts the level of dynamic  
(Dynamic range for movie soundtracks  
AUTO  
MAX  
MID  
OFF  
DELAY  
(Sound  
Delay)  
Some monitors have a slight  
delay when showing video, so the  
soundtrack will be slightly out of  
sync with the picture. By adding a  
bit of delay, you can adjust the  
sound to match the presentation  
of the video.  
0.0 to 10.0  
(frames)  
Range  
Control)  
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS,  
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,  
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master  
Audio (you may need to use this  
feature when listening to  
1 second = 30  
frames (NTSC)  
Default: 0.0  
surround sound at low volumes).  
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective  
surround sound of movies at low  
volumes.  
MIDNIGHT/  
LOUDNESS  
OFF  
MIDNIGHT ON  
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble  
from music sources at low  
volumes.  
LOUDNESS  
ON  
82  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
09  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Setting  
EFFECT  
What it does  
Option(s)  
LFE  
(LFE  
Some Dolby Digital and DTS  
audio sources include ultra-low  
0dB/ –5dB/  
–10dB/ –15dB/  
–20dB  
Sets the effect level for the  
currently selected Advanced  
Surround or ALC mode (each  
mode can be set separately).  
10 to 90  
Defaults: 50  
(90 for  
EXT.STEREO  
Attenuate) bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator  
as necessary to prevent the ultra-  
low bass tones from distorting the  
sound from the speakers.  
OFF  
only)  
a.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light.  
b.• Tone controls are disabled in THX listening modes.  
• When you set the Tone Control function to ON, MIDNIGHT/  
LOUDNESS is set to OFF. In the same way, when you set  
MIDNIGHT/LOUDNESS to ON, the Tone Control function is set to  
BYPASS.  
c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.  
d.With the iPod/USB and HOME MEDIA GALLERY input function, by  
default S.RTRV is set to ON.  
e.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals.  
Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.  
f. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD  
discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting  
back to 0 dB.  
g.• HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing  
synchronized amp mode operations.  
• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play  
the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with  
the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp  
mode on page 81.  
h.This feature is only available when the connected display supports  
the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lipsync’) for  
HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set  
A.DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more  
details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the  
manufacturer directly.  
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.  
j. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA  
mode.  
The LFE is not limited when set to  
0 dB, which is the recommended  
value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,  
–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is  
limited by the respective degree.  
When OFF is selected, no sound  
is output from the LFE channel.  
SACD  
Brings out detail in SACDs by  
maximizing the dynamic range  
(during digital processing).  
0dB  
f
GAIN  
+6 dB  
g
Specifies the routing of the HDMI  
audio signal out of this receiver  
(amp) or through to a TV or flat  
panel TV. When THROUGH is  
selected, no sound is output from  
this receiver.  
AMPLIFIER  
HDMI  
(HDMI  
Audio)  
THROUGH  
A.DELAY  
(Auto  
delay)  
This feature automatically  
OFF  
corrects the audio-to-video delay  
between components connected  
with an HDMI cable. The audio  
delay time is set depending on the  
operational status of the display  
connected with an HDMI cable.  
The video delay time is  
ON  
automatically adjusted according  
h
to the audio delay time.  
i
Provides a better blend of the  
front speakers by spreading the  
center channel between the front  
right and left speakers, making it  
sound wider (higher settings) or  
narrower (lower settings).  
0 to 7  
C.WIDTH  
(Center  
Width)  
Default: 3  
Setting the Video options  
There are a number of additional picture settings you can  
make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults,  
if not stated, are listed in bold.  
(Applicable  
only when  
using a  
center  
speaker)  
Important  
DIMENSIONi  
Adjusts the depth of the surround  
sound balance from front to back,  
making the sound more distant  
(minus settings), or more forward  
(positive settings).  
–3 to +3  
• Note that if an option cannot be selected on the  
VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to  
the current source, setting and status of the receiver.  
Default: 0  
• These functions do not affect inputs other than DVD,  
TV/SAT, DVR, VIDEO1, and VIDEO2.  
i
Extends the front stereo image to  
include the surround speakers for  
a ‘wraparound’ effect.  
OFF  
PANORAMA  
ON  
RECEIVER  
, then press VIDEO PARAMETER.  
1
2
Press  
j
Adjusts the center image to  
create a wider stereo effect with  
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0  
(all center channel sent to front  
right and left speakers) to 10  
(center channel sent to the center  
speaker only).  
0 to 10  
Use / to select the setting you want to adjust.  
C.IMAGE  
(Center  
Image)  
(Applicable  
only when  
using a  
center  
speaker)  
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,  
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the  
table (page 84) for notes on this.  
Defaults:  
Neo:6 MUSIC:  
Neo:6  
3
CINEMA: 10  
3
Use / to set it as necessary.  
See the table (page 84) for the options available for each  
1
setting.  
Note  
1 • All of the setting items can be set for each input function.  
• Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON.  
83  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
09  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
–6 to +6  
c
Setting  
V.CONV  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Adjusts saturation from dull to  
bright.  
CHROMA  
(Chroma  
Level)  
Default: 0  
Converts video signals for output  
ON  
(DigitalVideo from the MONITOR OUT jacks  
Conversion) (including HDMI OUT connector)  
for all video types (see page 25).  
OFF  
a.• When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not  
compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture will  
be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change  
the setting.  
• When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically  
according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by HDMI.  
When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same  
resolution as when input (At this time, video signals are only output  
from the same type of terminals to which they were input).  
• When a display is connected by HDMI, if this is set to something  
other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p  
signals are output from the component output terminals.  
• Conversion to 1080p is only performed for 480i, 576i, 480p and  
576p input signals.  
b.• If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect  
ratio on the source component or on the monitor.  
• This cannot be set when the resolution is set to PURE.  
• NORMAL setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video  
signals are being input.  
c.This setting is only displayed when 480i or 576i video signals are  
being input.  
a
Specifies the output resolution of  
AUTO  
PURE  
RES  
(Resolution)  
the video signal (when analog  
video input signals are output at  
the HDMI OUT connector, select  
this according to the resolution of  
your monitor and the images you  
wish to watch).  
480p/576p  
720p  
1080i  
1080p  
b
Specifies the aspect ratio when  
analog video input signals are  
output at the HDMI output. Make  
your desired settings while  
THROUGH  
NORMAL  
ASP  
(Aspect)  
checking each setting on your  
display (if the image doesn’t match  
your monitor type, cropping or  
black bands appear).  
c,d  
This setting optimizes the picture  
for film material when the video  
output is set to progressive.  
Usually set to AUTO; but try  
switching to OFF if the picture  
appears unnatural.  
AUTO  
PAL  
PCINEMA  
(PureCinema)  
d.This setting is only valid for component outputs.  
e.This setting is not valid for HDMI outputs.  
f. This setting is not displayed for component inputs.  
OFF  
Switching the speaker system  
Additionally, certain PAL movie  
video (576i, 25 frames/second STB  
video output or DVD disc playback,  
etc.) that contain film progressive  
material cannot be recognized as  
such by this receiver.  
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back speaker  
setting on page 109, three speaker system settings are  
possible using SPEAKERS. If you selected Normal, Front  
Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your  
main speaker system on or off. The options below are for  
1
c,d  
Adjusts the motion and still picture  
quality when video output is set to  
progressive.  
–4 to +4  
the Speaker B setting only.  
P.MOTION  
(Progressive  
Motion)  
Default: 0  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
(TUNE)  
VIDEO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
MULTI-ZONE  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND SURROUND  
(PRESET)  
ENTER  
(TUNE)  
(PRESET)  
c
Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the Y  
(brightness) component.  
0 to +8  
YNR  
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI  
4
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
Default: 0  
VIDEO CAMERA  
PHONES  
HOME MENU  
RETURN  
c
Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
–4 to +4  
Default: 0  
–4 to +4  
Default: 0  
DETAIL  
•
Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a  
speaker system setting.  
c,e  
Adjusts the sharpness of the high-  
frequency (detailed) elements in  
the picture.  
SHARP  
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal, the  
button will simply switch your main speaker system (A)  
on or off.  
(Sharpness)  
c
Adjusts the overall brightness.  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
–6 to +6  
Default: 0  
BRIGHT  
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:  
(Brightness)  
• SPA – Sound is output from speaker system A and  
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.  
c
Adjusts the contrast between light  
and dark.  
CONTRAST  
• SPB – Sound is output from the two speakers  
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel  
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output  
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.  
c,f  
Adjusts the red/green balance.  
HUE  
Note  
1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 108. However, if SPB is selected above, no sound  
is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).  
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 109 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.  
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.  
84  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
09  
1
• SPAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up  
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two  
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.  
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as  
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel  
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).  
• When the receiver is on, make sure that any  
operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and  
your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this  
is not showing, the front panel controls affect the  
main zone only.  
3
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source  
for the zone you have selected.  
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected  
to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.  
• SP(off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The  
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals  
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as  
when selecting speaker system A (above).  
• If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner controls  
to select a preset station (see Saving station presets  
2
on page 52 if you’re unsure how to do this).  
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls  
• When using ZONE 2 and ZONE 3, it is not possible to  
use the multi-zone function to play different inputs  
from among Home Media Gallery, iPod/USB, XM and  
SIRIUS Radio. (It is possible to play when using the  
main zone and ZONE 2 or the main zone and ZONE  
3.)  
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust  
the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-  
ZONE remote controls on page 85.  
4
Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
volume for the zone you have selected.  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
ADVANCED  
MCACC  
PQLS  
HDMI  
This is only possible if you selected the Variable volume  
control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 113.  
3
STANDBY/ON  
5
When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE  
CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls.  
You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front  
panel to switch off all output to the sub zone(s).  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
(TUNE)  
VIDEO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
MULTI-ZONE  
4
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
(PRESET)  
ENTER  
(TUNE)  
(PRESET)  
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI  
4
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
MULTI-ZONE remote controls  
VIDEO CAMERA  
PHONES  
HOME MENU  
RETURN  
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE  
3 to operate the corresponding zone.  
1
Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.  
The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE  
remote controls:  
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:  
• ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2) sub  
zone  
Button  
What it does  
Switches on/off power in the sub zone.  
• ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones  
• ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ZONE 3) sub  
zone  
INPUT SELECT Use to select the input function in the sub  
zone.  
Input function Use to select the input function directly (this  
• MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-ZONE  
feature off  
buttons  
may not work for some functions) in the sub  
zone.  
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE  
control has been switched ON.  
MASTER  
VOLUME +/–  
Use to set the listening volume in the sub  
zone.  
2
Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to  
MUTE  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it  
has been muted (adjusting the volume also  
restores the sound).  
select the sub zone(s) you want.  
If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle  
between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.  
Note  
1 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.  
2 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other  
zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.  
3 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.  
4 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.  
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in  
standby.  
85  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
09  
Making an audio or a video recording  
Reducing the level of an analog signal  
You can make an audio or a video recording from the  
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog  
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find  
that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear  
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source  
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).  
1
2
distortion in the sound.  
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an  
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the  
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in  
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 17 for more on connections).  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
4
5
6
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
7
8
9
REMOTE  
SETUP  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
Since the video converter is not available when making  
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use  
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder  
as you used to connect your video source (the one you  
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must  
connect your recorder using Component video if your  
source has also been connected using Component video.  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
INPUT  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
RECEIVER  
, then press A.ATT to switch the  
•
Press  
input attenuator on or off.  
For more information about video connections, see  
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and other video  
sources on page 30.  
Using the sleep timer  
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a  
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without  
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use  
the remote control to set the sleep timer.  
DVD  
BD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
HDMI  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
TV  
CD  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
HDMI OUT  
1
2
3
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
4
5
6
MAIN  
4
5
6
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
SBch  
A
ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
1
Select the source you want to record.  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
Use the input function buttons (or INPUT SELECT).  
RECEIVER  
, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set  
the sleep time.  
•
Press  
• If necessary, set the remote control to the receiver  
operation mode, then press SIGNAL SEL to select the  
input signal corresponding to the source component  
(see Choosing the input signal on page 63 for more  
on this).  
30 min  
Off  
60 min  
90 min  
2
Prepare the source you want to record.  
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time  
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.  
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will  
3
3
Prepare the recorder.  
cycle through the sleep options again.  
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording  
device and set the recording levels.  
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if  
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set  
the audio recording level automatically—check the  
component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.  
4
Start recording, then start playback of the source  
component.  
Note  
1 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), Video parameters and surround effects have no effect on the  
recorded signal.  
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.  
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.  
2 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.  
3 • You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.  
• The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.  
86  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
Dimming the display  
09  
Checking your system settings  
You can choose between four brightness levels for the  
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the  
display automatically brightens for a few seconds.  
Use the status display screen to check your current  
settings for features such as surround back channel  
processing and your current MCACC preset.  
HDD  
DVD  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
PGM  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
MEMORY  
1
2
3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
4
5
6
RECEIVER  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
7
8
9
REMOTE  
SETUP  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
RECEIVER  
/CLR  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
0
INPUT  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MAIN  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
, then press DIMMER repeatedly to  
1
Press  
, then press STATUS to check the  
•
Press  
system settings.  
These appear on the front panel display.  
change the brightness of the front panel display.  
2
The front panel display shows each of the following  
settings for three seconds each:  
Input Source  
Switching the HDMI output  
Set which terminal to use when outputting video and  
audio signals from the HDMI output terminals (HDMI  
OUT ALL, HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2).  
↓
Sampling Frequency  
↓
Surround Back channel Processing  
The HDMI OUT1 terminal is compatible with the KURO  
LINK function.  
↓
MCACC preset  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
↓
ZONE 2 input  
iPod USB TUNER  
XM  
SIRIUS  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
↓
INPUT  
SELECT  
ZONE 3 input  
HDMI OUT  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
1
2
3
↓
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
KURO LINK  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
4
5
6
↓
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
HDMI OUT  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
7
8
9
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS again to  
RECEIVER  
, then press HDMI OUT.  
•
Press  
Please wait a while when Please wait ... is displayed.  
The output switches among HDMI OUT ALL HDMI OUT 1  
switch off the display.  
,
1
and HDMI OUT 2 each time the button is pressed.  
Note  
1 • Synchronized amp mode on page 81 is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch  
to HDMI OUT 1, then select the synchronized amp mode on the flat panel TV using the flat panel TV’s remote control.  
• When the power is turned off then back on after switching the HDMI output, the input is set to a setting between HDMI1 and HDMI4, or BD.  
2 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.  
87  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
Resetting the system  
09  
Setting  
Default  
iPod/USB or HOME  
MEDIA GALLERY  
function  
Sound Retriever  
ON  
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to  
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.  
Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF.  
Other functions  
OFF  
Sound Delay  
Dual Mono  
DRC  
0.0 frame  
• Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from  
the receiver beforehand.  
CH1  
AUTO  
1
2
Switch the receiver into standby.  
SACD Gain  
LFE Attenuate  
Auto delay  
Up Mix  
0 dB  
0 dB  
While holding down ENTER on the front panel,  
press STANDBY/ON  
The display shows RESET NO .  
.
OFF  
ON  
Digital Safety  
Effect Level  
OFF  
3
Select ‘RESET’ using /, then press ENTER on  
EXT.STEREO  
Other modes  
Center Width  
Dimension  
90  
the front panel.  
The display shows RESET? OK.  
50  
2 PL II Music  
Options  
3
4
Press ENTER to confirm.  
0
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver  
has been reset to the factory default settings.  
Panorama  
OFF  
Neo:6 Options  
Center Image  
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3  
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10  
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the  
receiver is unplugged.  
All Inputs  
Listening Mode  
(2 ch)  
AUTO  
SURROUND  
Default system settings  
Setting  
Listening Mode  
(x ch)  
AUTO  
SURROUND  
Default  
ON  
Digital Video Conversion  
SPEAKERS  
Listening Mode (HP) STEREO  
A
See also Setting the Audio options on page 82 for other default  
Surround Back System  
Normal  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALLx2  
YES  
DSP settings.  
Speaker System  
Front  
MCACC  
Center  
Surr  
SB  
MCACC Position Memory  
Channel Level (M1 to M6)  
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)  
M1: MEMORY 1  
0.0 dB  
10.00 ft  
SW  
Standing Wave  
(M1 to M6)  
Standing Wave  
On/Off  
ON  
Crossover  
X-Curve  
80 Hz  
OFF  
ATT of all channels/ 0.0 dB  
filters  
THX Audio Setting  
DIMMER  
4 ft<  
SWch Trim  
All channels/bands 0.0 dB  
EQ Trim 0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
Brightest  
EQ Data (M1 to M6)  
Inputs  
See Input function default and possible settings on page 45.  
MULTI-ZONE  
ZONE 2/3 Volume Level  
ZONE 2/3 Volume  
HDMI  
Variable  
–60 dB  
HDMI Audio  
Amp  
HDMI output  
HDMI OUT ALL  
ON  
KURO LINK  
DSP  
Surround back channel Processing  
Phase Control  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
Full Band Phase Control  
88  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
10  
Chapter 10:  
Controlling the rest of your system  
However, there are cases where only certain functions  
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset  
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote  
control will not work for the model that you are using.  
Operating multiple receivers  
The remote control included with this receiver can be  
used to operate up to three other receivers (of the same  
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the  
component you want to control, you can still teach the  
remote individual commands from another remote  
control (see Programming signals from other remote  
controls on page 90).  
model as this receiver) in addition to this receiver. The  
receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the  
preset code to set the remote control setting.  
• Set the remote modes on the receivers before using  
this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on  
page 114).  
Note  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing  
1
2
3
RECEIVER  
. To go back a step, press RETURN.  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
4
5
6
REMOTE  
SETUP  
• After ten seconds of inactivity, the remote  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
automatically exits the operation.  
7
8
9
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
MAIN  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
INPUT  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
Selecting preset codes directly  
1
2
3
Check the operation selector switch to MAIN  
Press RECEIVER  
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after  
.
1
Press the input function button for the component  
.
you want to control.1  
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV  
CTRL here.  
the LED flashes twice.  
4
Use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit preset  
2
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after  
code (see below).  
the LED flashes twice.  
• Receiver 1: 6 1 9 3 5 (Default)  
3
Use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit preset  
• Receiver 2: 6 2 6 3 0  
• Receiver 3: 6 2 6 3 1  
• Receiver 4: 6 2 6 3 2  
code.  
See Preset code list on the separate booklet.  
The LED flashes twice when the preset code has been  
properly registered. When the preset code is fully input,  
the LED flashes once to indicate that the setting has  
failed.  
The LED flashes twice when the preset code has been  
properly registered. When the preset code is fully input,  
the LED flashes once to indicate that the setting has  
failed.  
4
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other components  
To operate another receiver, start over from step 1 to  
input its preset code.  
you want to control.  
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or  
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t  
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there  
is one).  
Setting the remote to control other  
components  
Most components can be assigned to one of the input  
function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the  
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the  
remote.  
Note  
1 You can’t assign RECEIVER , TUNER, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS.  
89  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
10  
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be  
learned from other remote controls. The buttons  
available are shown below:  
Programming signals from other  
remote controls  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
If the preset code for your component is not available, or  
the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you  
can program signals from the remote control of another  
component. This can also be used to program additional  
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
HDMI  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
CATEGORY  
1
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
HOME  
MENU  
assigning a preset code.  
iPod CTRL  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
1
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
1
2
3
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
the LED flashes twice.  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
HDD  
PGM  
4
5
6
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
2
Use the number buttons to enter 9, 7, 5.  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
The LED flashes twice.  
7
8
9
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
/CLR  
3
Press the input function button for the component  
you want to control.2  
Point the two remote controls towards each other,  
0
INPUT  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
TV CONTROL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
4
CH  
VOL  
then press the button that will be doing the learning on  
this receiver’s remote control.  
MUTE  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
3
The LED flashes continuously for about 5 seconds.  
6
To program additional signals for the current  
component repeat steps 4 and 5.  
To program signals for another component, exit and  
repeat steps 1 through 5.  
• The remote controls should be 3 cm (1 inch) apart.  
3 cm (1 inch)  
5
Press the corresponding button on the other  
Erasing the remote control button  
settings  
remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to  
this receiver’s remote control.  
For example, if you want to learn the playback control  
signal, press and hold briefly. If the LED flashes twice  
then turns off, this indicates that learning has been  
successful. If the LED only flashes once, learning has  
This erases the buttons you have programmed and  
restores the button to the factory default.  
1
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after  
the LED flashes twice.  
4
failed.  
2
Use the number buttons to enter 9, 7, 6.  
The LED flashes twice.  
3
Press the input function button corresponding to  
the command to be erased, then press the button to be  
erased twice.  
To erase all the settings stored at the input function  
buttons, press the input function button twice here.  
The LED flashes twice to confirm the button has been  
erased.  
4
Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.  
Note  
1 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).  
2 • You can’t assign TUNER, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod USB, XM or SIRIUS.  
• The TV CONTROL buttons (TV, TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/– and INPUT) can only be learned after the TV CTRL is pressed.  
3 The learning mode is cancelled if no remote control signal is received within 5 seconds.  
4 • Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.  
• Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or  
farther apart.  
• If the LED flashes once, it means the memory is full. See Erasing the remote control button settings above to erase a programmed button  
you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).  
90  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
Multi Operation and System Off  
10  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
HDMI  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a  
series of up to 32 commands for the components in your  
system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on  
your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using  
only two buttons on the remote control.  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
CATEGORY  
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
HOME  
MENU  
iPod CTRL  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use  
one button to stop and switch off a series of components  
in your system at the same time. The System Off feature  
allows you to program a series of 5 commands for the  
1
2
3
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
HDD  
PGM  
4
5
6
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
1
components in your system.  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
INPUT  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
Programming a multi-operation  
TV CONTROL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
INPUT  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
1
2
3
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
MAIN  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
4
5
6
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
HDMI  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on  
or off. This is done automatically.  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
7
8
9
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
INPUT  
iPod USB TUNER  
INPUT  
SIRIUS  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
MAIN  
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown  
sequence (except DVD recorders);  
1
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after  
the LED flashes twice.  
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).  
2
Use the number buttons to enter 9, 9, 5.  
5
Repeat step 4 to program a sequence.  
• A space of 250 ms can be input between commands  
by pressing REMOTE SETUP between commands.  
The LED flashes twice.  
If you selected System Off, go to step 3.  
If you selected Multi Operation, go to step 4.  
• If the LED does not light when the input function  
button is pressed, this indicates that there is no  
command for that input function.  
3
Press the SOURCE button.  
4
Press the input function button for the component  
whose command you want to input, then press the  
button for the command you want to input.  
For example, if you want to start the sequence by  
switching on your DVD player, press DVD, then press   
SOURCE.  
Using multi operations  
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched  
on, or in standby.  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
The following remote control commands can be selected:  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
HDMI  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
INPUT  
SELECT  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
HDMI OUT  
MAIN  
1
2
3
1
2
Press MULTI OPE  
.
Press an input function button that has been set up  
with a multi operation.  
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the  
programmed multi operation is performed automatically.  
Note  
1 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see  
Operating multiple receivers on page 89 for more on this).  
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.  
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.  
91  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
10  
Using System off  
Controls the components  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
HDMI  
This remote control can control components after  
entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to  
control other components on page 89 for more on this).  
Use the input function buttons to select the component.  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are  
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL  
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the  
TV CTRL button.  
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
1
2
Press MULTI OPE  
.
Press SOURCE  
.
The command sequence you programmed will run, then  
all Pioneer components will switch off , followed by this  
receiver.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
1
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
HDMI  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
Resetting the remote control presets  
INPUT  
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and  
SELECT  
HDMI OUT  
1
2
3
2
programmed buttons.  
SIGNAL SEL MCACC  
SLEEP  
4
5
6
1
2
3
Check the operation selector switch to MAIN  
Press RECEIVER  
Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then release it after  
.
SBch  
A.ATT  
DIMMER  
7
8
9
.
D.ACCESS CH LEVEL  
CLASS  
ENTER  
/CLR  
0
INPUT  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
the LED flashes twice.  
TV CONTROL  
4
Use the number buttons to enter 9, 8, 1.  
CH  
VOL  
MUTE  
The LED flashes four times to indicate that the resetting  
is completed.  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
PARAMETER  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
Default preset codes  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
Input function button Preset code  
PRESET  
ENTER  
PRESET  
RETURN  
DVD  
BD  
3 1 5 7 1  
3 2 4 4 2  
2 2 3 0 6  
3 2 4 4 2  
1 4 0 0 1  
7 0 4 6 8  
7 1 0 8 7  
1 4 0 0 1  
6 1 9 3 5  
CATEGORY  
HOME  
MENU  
TUNE  
iPod CTRL  
DVR  
HDMI  
TV  
AUTO/ALC/  
DIRECT  
MENU  
STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR  
DVD  
HDD  
PGM  
THX  
PHASE CTRL  
STATUS  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
CD  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
CD-R  
TV CTRL  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
RECEIVER  
ZONE 2  
ZONE 3  
MAIN  
RECEIVER  
Note  
1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.  
2 When Selecting preset codes directly on page 89 are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is  
convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.  
92  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
10  
Button(s)  
TV  
TV (Monitor)  
BD/DVD  
HDD/DVR  
VCR  
SAT/CATV  
SOURCE  
POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF  
Number buttons numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
CLEAR  
numerics  
+
numerics  
CLEAR  
–
numerics  
• (dot)  
• (dot)  
KURO LINK  
CH ENTER  
ENTER  
CH ENTER  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
(CLASS)  
EXIT/INFO  
EXIT  
TOP MENU  
TOP MENU/  
DISC NAVI  
–
–
LIST  
a
TOOLS/GUIDE  
USER MENU  
GUIDE  
GUIDE  
TOOLS  
///  
///  
ENTER  
///  
ENTER  
///  
ENTER  
///  
ENTER  
–
–
–
///  
ENTER  
ENTER  
HOME MENU  
HOME MENU  
HOME MENU  
HOME MENU  
HOME  
RETURN  
RETURN  
RETURN  
RETURN  
–
RETURN  
HDD (Red)  
DVD (Green)  
(Yellow)  
(Blue)  
Red  
Red  
–
HDD  
DVD  
VCR  
MENU  
–
A/Red  
B/Green  
C/Yellow  
MENU/Blue  
E/  
Green  
Green  
–
–
Yellow  
Yellow  
–
–
Blue  
Blue  
MENU  
–
–
–
–
AUTO SETUP  
FREEZE  
–
–
–
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
–
D/  
–
–
ANT  
AV SELECTION  
SCREEN SIZE  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH+/–  
–
AUDIO  
DISP  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH+/–  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY  
CH+/–  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY/INFO  
CH+/–  
CH +/–  
OUTPUT  
CH+/–  
RESOLUTION  
a
+/–  
+   
–
–
–
–
–
RECORD  
a.Controls for BD.  
93  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
10  
Button(s)  
LD  
CD/CD-R/SACD  
MD/DAT  
TAPE  
Button(s)  
TV (Projector)  
POWER ON  
MOVIE  
SOURCE  
POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF  
SOURCE  
Number buttons numerics  
numerics  
numerics  
–
1
b
• (dot)  
+10  
>10/CLEAR  
DISC/ENTER  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
2
STANDARD  
DYNAMIC  
USER1  
b
ENTER  
(CLASS)  
ENTER  
OPEN/CLOSE  
3
4
TOP MENU  
–
–
–
–
MS  
5
USER2  
6
USER3  
a
MS  
LEGATO LINK  
7
COLOR+  
SHARP+  
GAMMA  
COLOR  
///  
///  
–
–
–
–
///  
8
ENTER  
ENTER  
–
–
9
a
SACD SETUP  
–
0
• (dot)  
SHARP  
RETURN  
–
–
–
ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP  
HDD (Red)  
(Yellow)  
(Blue)  
–
PROGRAM  
REPEAT  
SHUFFLE  
–
–
EXIT  
–
–
–
–
–
–
INFO  
///  
///  
ENTER  
ENTER  
TEST  
–
–
HIDE  
MENU  
HDMI1  
a
AUDIO  
DISP  
AUDIO  
DISPLAY/INFO  
PURE AUDIO  
HDMI2  
a
TIME  
–
–
COMP.  
a. Controls for SACD.  
b. Controls for MD.  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
BRIGHT  
BRIGHT+  
POWER OFF  
ASPECT  
CONTRAST+/  
AUDIO  
DISP  
CH +/–  
94  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
Chapter 11:  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
3
Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the HOME MENU,  
then press ENTER  
.
Making receiver settings from the  
Advanced MCACC menu  
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Advanced MCACC  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic  
Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s  
laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home  
users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a  
studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic  
characteristics of the listening environment are  
measured and the frequency response is calibrated  
accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis  
and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it  
closer to a studio environment than ever before.  
Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate  
standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing  
wave control function using a unique process to perform  
acoustic analysis and reduce their influence.  
Exit  
Return  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
1.Advanced MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Full Auto MCACC  
b. Auto MCACC  
c. Manual MCACC  
d. Demo  
Exit  
Return  
This section describes how to calibrate the sound field  
automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data  
manually.  
• Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase  
Control) on page 42 for a quick and effective  
automatic surround setup.  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
RECEIVER  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
HDMI  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
• Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 96 for a more detailed MCACC setup. In  
addition, the Full Band Phase Control function  
calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the  
connected speakers.  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
CATEGORY  
HOME  
MENU  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
iPod USB TUNER  
INPUT  
SIRIUS  
MAIN  
iPod CTRL  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Use RECEIVER to switch on.  
• Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings  
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see  
Manual MCACC setup on page 98).  
1
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,  
disconnect them.  
• Demo – No settings are saved and no errors occur.  
When the speakers are connected to this receiver,  
the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to  
cancel the test tone.  
, then press HOME MENU 2  
.
RECEIVER  
2
Press  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME  
MENU.  
• The screen saver will automatically appear after five  
minutes of inactivity.  
Note  
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the HOME MENU.  
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when the HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM, SIRIUS or iPod/USB input function is selected (in either the main or  
sub zone). When you set ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 85), you can’t use the HOME MENU.  
95  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Automatic MCACC (Expert)  
11  
2
Select the parameters you want to set.  
Use / to select the item, then use / to set.  
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those  
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 42, you  
can customize your setup options below. You can  
calibrate your system differently for up to six different  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
ALL  
Speaker Setting  
ALL  
Speaker Setting  
Channel Level  
Speaker Distance  
EQ Pro & S-Wave  
Full Band Phase Ctrl  
Channel Level  
SYMMETRY  
ALL CH ADJ  
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3  
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
M2.MEMORY 2  
Speaker Distance  
EQ Pro & S-Wave  
Full Band Phase Ctrl  
SYMMETRY  
ALL CH ADJ  
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3  
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
M2.MEMORY 2  
THX Speaker  
:
NO  
THX Speaker  
:
NO  
START  
START  
1
MCACC presets , which are useful if you have different  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
listening positions depending on the type of source (for  
example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video  
game close to the TV).  
2
• Auto MCACC – The default is ALL (recommended),  
but you can limit the system calibration to only one  
4
setting (to save time) if you want. The available  
Important  
5
options are ALL, Keep SP System, Speaker  
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance, EQ Pro  
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved  
& S-Wave and Full Band Phase Ctrl.  
during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
• EQ Type (only available when the Auto MCACC  
Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines  
how the frequency balance is adjusted.  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
3
After a single calibration is performed, each of the  
following three correction curves can be stored  
CAUTION  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)  
implements symmetric correction for each pair of left  
and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude  
characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all  
the speakers are set individually so no special weighting  
®
THX  
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered  
in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
6
is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN sets all  
speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings  
(no equalization is applied to the front left and right  
channels).  
1
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC  
menu, then press ENTER  
.
• THX Speaker (only available when the Auto MCACC  
Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES  
if you are using THX speakers (set all speakers to  
SMALL), otherwise leave it set to NO.  
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to  
Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu  
on page 95.  
1.Advanced MCACC  
1b.Auto MCACC  
• STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available when the  
Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In  
addition to measurements at the listening position,  
you can use two more reference points for which test  
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is  
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Full Auto MCACC  
ALL  
Speaker Setting  
Channel Level  
b. Auto MCACC  
c. Manual MCACC  
d. Demo  
SYMMETRY  
ALL CH ADJ  
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
M2.MEMORY 2  
FRONT ALIGH: M3.MEMORY 3  
Speaker Distance  
EQ Pro & S-Wave  
Full Band Phase Ctrl  
THX Speaker  
:
NO  
START  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
7
for several seating positions in your listening area.  
Place the microphone at the reference point  
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone  
placement will be at your main listening position:  
Note  
1 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6 until you rename them in Data Management on page 106.  
2 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.  
3 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Auto MCACC menu (step 2).  
4 • The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when Keep SP System or EQ Pro & S-Wave is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Professional on page 101 for more on this.  
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For  
details, see Setting the Audio options on page 82.  
5 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 109) unchanged.  
6 If you selected ALL as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJ and FRONT  
ALIGN settings.  
7 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.  
96  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
• With error messages (such as Too much ambient  
noise! or Check microphone) select RETRY after  
checking for ambient noise (see Problems when  
using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 44) and  
verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to  
be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
2nd reference  
3rd reference  
point  
point  
1
2
3
Main listening  
position  
7
If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in  
the GUI screen.2  
3
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
jack on the front panel.  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the  
speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,  
the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this  
case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in  
step 8.  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
(TUNE)  
VIDEO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
TUNER EDIT  
BAND AUTO SURR/ALC/ HOME STANDARD ADVANCED STEREO  
MULTI-ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
STREAM DIRECT THX  
SURROUND SURROUND  
(PRESET)  
ENTER  
(TUNE)  
(PRESET)  
iPod  
iPhone  
HDMI  
VIDEO CAMERA  
4
USB  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
HONES  
HOME MENU  
RETURN  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
Now Analyzing...  
2/10  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
10  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
:
:
:
OK  
Speaker YES/NO  
OK  
RETRY  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that  
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you  
do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
Cancel  
1
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker  
microphone.  
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a  
problem with the speaker connection.  
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power  
and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t  
seem to be a problem, you can simply use / to  
select the speaker and / to change the setting  
and continue.  
4
When you’re finished settings the options, select  
START then press ENTER  
.
5 Follow the instructions on-screen.  
• Make sure the microphone is connected.  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically  
detected every time you switch on the system. Make  
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s wiring  
(+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker  
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 44 for notes regarding high background noise  
levels and other possible interference.  
3
connections.  
– If the connections were wrong, turn off the power,  
disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly.  
After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure  
again.  
6
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish  
outputting test tones.  
– If the connections were right, select GO NEXT and  
continue.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
it’s doing this.  
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This  
may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
Note  
1 It may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.  
2 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting from the Auto MCACC menu.  
3 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective  
speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.  
97  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
8
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER  
.
• Output PC – The data transfer mode with the  
connected computer is set. The graphs of the reverb  
characteristics and group delay characteristics  
before and after calibration and the various MCACC  
parameters can be checked (see Output PC on  
page 106 for more on this).  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker  
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.  
1b.Auto MCACC  
1b.Auto MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
Press RETURN after you have finished checking each  
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back  
to the HOME MENU.  
Now Analyzing...  
Now Analyzing...  
5/10  
Surround Analysis  
Speaker System  
Channel Level  
Speaker Distance  
Standing Wave  
Reverb  
Subwoofer Check  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
OK  
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver  
upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.  
Aco Cal EQ Pro  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
Cancel  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.  
Manual MCACC setup  
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup  
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more  
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,  
you should have already completed Automatically setting  
up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase  
Control) on page 42.  
• If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point setup  
(in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the  
2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it  
at your main listening position.  
9
The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and  
the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the  
Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual  
You only need to make these settings once (unless you  
change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers).  
CAUTION  
1
SP Setup menu (starting on page 108).  
• The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are  
output at high volume.  
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting  
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check  
screen:  
Important  
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers  
you’ve connected (see page 109 for more on this)  
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you  
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing  
HOME MENU (step 2 in Making receiver settings from  
the Advanced MCACC menu on page 95).  
• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker  
system (see page 99 or 110 for more on this)  
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers  
from the listening position (see page 100 or 111 for  
more on this)  
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect  
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it  
about ear level at your normal listening position.  
Press HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU  
before you connect the microphone to this receiver. If  
the microphone is connected while the HOME  
MENU is not being displayed, the display will change  
to the Full Auto MCACC under Advanced MCACC.  
2
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower  
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 100 for more on this)  
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency  
balance of your speaker system based on the  
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 101  
for more on this)  
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 44 for notes regarding high background noise  
levels and other possible interference.  
• Group Delay – The original characteristics of group  
delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted  
characteristics can be displayed graphically (see  
Group Delay on page 105 for more on this).  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up  
the volume to the middle position.  
Note  
1 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with  
different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 108.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking  
delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend  
adjusting the settings manually.  
2 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal  
surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.  
98  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced  
Fine Channel Level  
MCACC menu.  
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC  
menu on page 95 if you’re not already at this screen.  
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)  
You can achieve better surround sound by properly  
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You  
can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB  
increments. The following setting can help you make  
detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the  
Manual speaker setup on page 108.  
1.Advanced MCACC  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Full Auto MCACC  
1. Fine Channel Level  
b. Auto MCACC  
c. Manual MCACC  
d. Demo  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
5. EQ Professional  
1
Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual  
MCACC setup menu.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
1c.Manual MCACC  
1c1.Fine Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to  
make these settings in order.  
1. Fine Channel Level  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
CAUTION  
Loud test tones will be output.  
5. EQ Professional  
• Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments to the  
overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine  
Channel Level below).  
Please wait...**  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Cancel  
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for  
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on  
page 100).  
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.  
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want  
to keep the level around 0.0dB so that you’ll have plenty  
of room to adjust the other speaker levels.  
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low  
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing  
Wave on page 100).  
1c1.Fine Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the  
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust  
on page 101:  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
Reference Ch  
Ref.Ch Level  
:
:
L
0.0 dB  
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance  
of your speaker system while listening to test tones  
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 101).  
Exit  
Cancel  
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on  
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make  
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb  
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Professional on page 101).  
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/  
–10.0 dB) as necessary.  
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker you  
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds  
like both tones are the same volume, press to confirm  
and continue to the next channel.  
1c1.Fine Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
R <=>  
:
L
L
0.0 dB  
R
C
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
Exit  
Finish  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use / to select it.  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
99  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,  
press to confirm and continue to the next channel.  
Fine Speaker Distance  
• Default setting: 10’00” (all speakers)  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,  
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some  
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening  
position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use / to select it.  
1
each speaker in /2 inch increments. The following  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you  
may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on  
page 108.  
Standing Wave  
2
1
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC  
• Default setting: ON /ATT 0.0dB (all filters)  
setup menu.  
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain  
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system  
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the  
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative  
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower  
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your  
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,  
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The  
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of  
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During  
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used  
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1c2.Fine SP Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Fine Channel Level  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
Reference Ch  
Ref.Ch Distance  
:
:
L
10’00”  
5. EQ Professional  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Cancel  
2
Adjust the distance of the left channel from the  
listening position.  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance  
3
presets.  
as necessary.  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC  
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected  
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in  
terms of speaker distance from 0’00-1/2” to 45’00”.  
setup menu.  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1c3.Standing Wave  
A/V RECEIVER  
Filter 1 Filter 2  
Filter 3  
ATT TRIM  
[dB] [dB]  
1. Fine Channel Level  
1c2.Fine SP Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
Filter  
Freq ATT Freq ATT Freq  
Q
Q
Q
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
Channel  
[Hz] [dB] [Hz] [dB] [Hz]  
R <=>  
:
L
SW  
63 5.0 10 120 5.0 10 201 5.0 10 +10.0  
L
10’10”  
dB  
0
5. EQ Professional  
MCACC  
R
C
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
9’10”  
10’10”  
9’00”  
9’00”  
6’00”  
6’00”  
12’10”  
M1.MEMORY1  
5
10  
16  
32  
63  
125  
250  
500  
1k Hz  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
Exit  
Finish  
2
Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave  
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the  
target channel. From the listening position, face the two  
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each  
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are  
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of  
Control.  
• Filter Channel – Select the channel to which you will  
apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel  
and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).  
• TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is  
SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to  
1
you and between your arm span.  
compensate for the difference in output post-filter).  
Note  
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.  
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be  
difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).  
2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio options on page 82 for more on this.  
3 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.  
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.  
• When Standing Wave is selected for an MCACC preset memory where STAND.WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER,  
STAND.WAVE ON is automatically selected.  
100  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
• Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where  
Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting  
and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the  
narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation  
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted  
frequency).  
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the  
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might  
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until  
OVER! disappears from the display.  
Tip  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too  
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the speaker  
balance seems uneven, you can raise or lower channel  
levels using test tones with the TRIM feature. Use /  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust  
1
• Default setting: ON /0.0dB (all channels/bands)  
to select TRIM, then use / to raise or lower the  
channel level for the current speaker.  
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room  
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It  
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your  
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that  
can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’  
equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the  
adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)  
on page 42 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 96, you  
can also adjust these settings manually to get a  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room  
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It  
can also provide you with a graphical output of the  
3
frequency response of your room.  
2
frequency balance that suits your tastes.  
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant  
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’), or that  
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb  
characteristics, select EQ Pro & S-Wave (or ALL) for the  
Auto MCACC setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 96 to calibrate the room automatically. This should  
provide a balanced calibration that suits the  
1
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Fine Channel Level  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
5. EQ Professional  
characteristics of your listening room.  
Exit  
Return  
If you still aren’t satisfied with the results, the manual  
Advanced EQ Setup (below) provides a more  
customized calibration of your system using the direct  
sound of the speakers. This is done with the help of a  
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or  
using a computer (with software available from Pioneer  
— see Output PC on page 106).  
2
Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your  
liking.  
1c4.EQ Adjust  
A/V RECEIVER  
dB  
Ch :  
L
0.0 -8.0 -6.0 0.0 +3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0 0.0 0.0  
MCACC  
M1.MEMORY1  
How to interpret the graphical output  
63 125 250 500 1k 8k 16k TRIM  
2k  
4k  
[Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz]  
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time (in  
milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line  
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a  
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when  
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually  
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this  
usually takes about 100 ms or so).  
Exit  
Finish  
Use / to select the channel.  
Use / to select the frequency and / to boost or  
cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of  
the screen and press to return to Ch, then use /to  
select the channel.  
Note  
1 You can switch on or off the Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. See Setting the Audio options on page 82 for  
more on this.  
2 When EQ Adjust is selected for an MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ ON is automatically  
selected.  
3 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a  
computer (with software available from Pioneer—see Output PC on page 106 for more on this).  
101  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how  
your room is responding to certain frequencies.  
• Reverb characteristics for different channels –  
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for  
each channel. Since this difference increases as the  
sound is influenced by the various room  
characteristics, it is often better to capture a  
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of  
channel frequencies/sounds.  
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are  
taken into account automatically (compensation is  
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency  
measurements can be examined both with and without  
1
the equalization performed by this receiver.  
Front L  
Level  
Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
according to your room characteristics  
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at  
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing  
the time that is best for system calibration with your  
particular room characteristics.  
Front R  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
calibration range  
Time  
(in msec)  
0
80  
160  
The graph below shows the difference between  
conventional acoustic calibration and professional  
calibration (the gray circle indicates the point where the  
microphone captures sound during frequency analysis).  
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often  
not necessary to make a 30-50ms setting. Later time  
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience  
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what  
works best for your particular room.  
Level  
Test tone  
Note that changing the room (for example, moving  
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.  
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
calibration range  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec)  
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional  
0
80  
160  
1
Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.  
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it  
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,  
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner  
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the  
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of 30-50ms  
to compensate for two major factors that will influence  
the sound of most rooms:  
1c.Manual MCACC  
A/V RECEIVER  
1c5.EQ Professional  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Fine Channel Level  
a. Reverb Measurement  
2. Fine SP Distance  
3. Standing Wave  
4. EQ Adjust  
b. Reverb View  
c. Advanced EQ Setup  
5. EQ Professional  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –  
Depending on your room, you may find that lower  
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to  
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).  
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the  
measurement is done too late.  
2
Select an option and press ENTER.  
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the  
reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical  
output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced  
MCACC output on page 38 to connect an RS-232C  
cable before selecting this option).  
Low  
frequencies  
Level  
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb  
High  
frequencies  
measurements made for specified frequency ranges  
2
in each channel.  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro.  
calibration range  
ConventionalMCACC  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec)  
0
80  
160  
Note  
1 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most  
obvious when comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.  
2 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on  
page 42 or Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph.  
With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph  
shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the  
reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing  
waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb  
Measurement function.  
102  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time  
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and  
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of  
your listening area. Note that customizing system  
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you  
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 42  
or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 96 and is not  
necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.  
The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full  
Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements  
3
are conducted.  
Use / to select the channel, frequency and  
calibration setting you want to check. Use / to go  
back and forth between the three. The reverb  
characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can  
be displayed by selecting Calibration : Before / After.  
4
Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate  
decibels in 2 dB steps.  
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ  
ON or OFF, and then START  
.
5
If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select the  
MCACC memory to be stored, then enter the desired  
1c5a.Reverb Measurement  
A/V RECEIVER  
time setting for calibration, and then select START  
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can  
choose the time period that will be used for the final  
.
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
EQ OFF  
Reverb Measure with :  
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you  
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is  
best to use the measurement results as a reference for  
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we  
recommend using the 30-50ms setting.  
START  
Exit  
Cancel  
The following options determine how the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in  
Reverb View and Output PC (see Connecting a PC for  
Advanced MCACC output on page 38):  
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC  
Time Position  
EQ Type  
:
:
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
30-50ms  
SYMMETRY  
NO  
MCACC  
Time Position  
EQ Type  
:
:
:
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
30-50ms  
SYMMETRY  
NO  
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
your listening area without the equalization  
performed by this receiver (before calibration).  
STAND.WAVE Multi-P  
STAND.WAVE Multi-P  
START  
START  
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
Exit  
Cancel  
Exit  
Cancel  
your listening area with the equalization performed  
1
by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ  
Use / to select the setting. Use / to switch  
between them.  
response may not appear entirely flat due to  
adjustments necessary for your listening area.  
2
Select the setting from the following time periods (in  
milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms, 20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-  
60ms, 50-70ms and 60-80ms. This setting will be applied  
to all channels during calibration.  
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select  
Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 120  
for troubleshooting information.  
When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2  
to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.  
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the  
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN  
when you’re done.  
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are  
given the option to check the settings on-screen.  
1c5b.Reverb View  
A/V RECEIVER  
Channel  
Frequency  
Calibration:  
dB  
:
:
Front  
63Hz  
After  
M1.MEMORY 1  
SYMMETRY  
16 kHz  
8 kHz  
4 kHz  
2 kHz  
1 kHz  
500 Hz  
250 Hz  
125 Hz  
63 Hz  
63.0  
61.0  
59.0  
57.0  
55.0  
53.0  
0
40  
80  
120  
160 ms  
Exit  
Return  
Note  
1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset,  
exit the HOME MENU and press MCACC to select it before pressing HOME MENU.  
2 After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed  
by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.  
3 The After display when measurements have been made using the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC (ALL) function shows the graph for the  
inferred reverb characteristics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibration.  
4 The reverb characteristics graph is overwritten each time the reverberations are measured. No Data is displayed if there is no reverb  
characteristic data, for example before measurements have been taken.  
103  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
Checking MCACC Data  
11  
Speaker Setting  
Use this to display the speaker size and number of  
speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 109 for more on  
this.  
At the procedure of Automatically setting up for surround  
sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on  
page 42, the procedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 96 or after fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup  
on page 98, you can check your calibrated settings using  
the GUI screen or, if a computer is connected, on the  
computer’s screen.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data  
Check menu.  
2a.Speaker Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
SB  
:
:
:
:
:
LARGE  
LARGE  
LARGE  
LARGE x 2  
YES  
1
Set the remote control to the receiver operation  
SW  
mode, then press HOME MENU  
.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
Exit  
Return  
2
Select the channel you want to check.  
Use / to select the channel. The corresponding  
channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.  
2
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the HOME  
MENU  
.
Channel Level  
Use this to display the level of the various channels. See  
Channel Level on page 110 for more on this.  
HOME MENU  
2.MCACC Data Check  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Advanced MCACC  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
a. Speaker Setting  
b. Channel Level  
c. Speaker Distance  
d. Standing Wave  
e. Acoustic Cal EQ  
f. Group Delay  
g. Output PC  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data  
Check menu.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2b.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
3
Select the setting you want to check.  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
• Speaker Setting – Used to check the settings of the  
speaker systems. See Speaker Setting below for more  
on this.  
• Channel Level – Used to check the output level of the  
different speakers. See Channel Level below for more  
on this.  
Exit  
Return  
2
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use / to select  
the MCACC preset you want to check.  
The level of the various channels set at the selected  
MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels  
that are not connected.  
• Speaker Distance – Used to check the distance to  
the different speakers. See Speaker Distance on  
page 105 for more on this.  
• Standing Wave – Used to check the standing wave  
control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 105  
for more on this.  
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check the calibration  
values of the listening environment’s frequency  
response. See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 105 for more  
on this.  
• Group Delay – Used to check the speakers’ group  
delay (both before and after calibration). See Group  
Delay on page 105 for more on this.  
• Output PC – See Output PC on page 106 for more on  
this.  
4
Press RETURN to go back to MCACC Data Check  
menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the HOME MENU.  
104  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
Speaker Distance  
Acoustic Cal EQ  
Use this to display the distance from the different  
channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance  
on page 111 for more on this.  
Use this to display the calibration values for the  
frequency response of the various channels set in the  
different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Adjust on page 101 for more on this.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data  
Check menu.  
1
Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data  
Check menu.  
2c.Speaker Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
2e.Acoustic Cal EQ  
A/V RECEIVER  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
dB  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
10’10”  
10’10”  
9’10”  
9’00”  
6’00”  
6’00”  
9’00”  
12’10”  
Ch :  
L
0.0 -8.0 -6.0 0.0 +3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0 0.0 0.0  
MCACC  
M1.MEMORY1  
63 125 250 500 1k 8k 16k TRIM  
2k  
4k  
[Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz] [Hz]  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2
When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use / to select  
the MCACC preset you want to check.  
2
When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use / to select the  
The distance from the various channels set at the  
selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for  
channels that are not connected.  
channel.  
The calibration value for the frequency response of the  
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset  
and its graph are displayed.  
Standing Wave  
3
Press  
to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use / to  
Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment  
values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing  
Wave on page 100 for more on this.  
select the MCACC preset you want to check.  
Group Delay  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data  
Use this to display the calibrated speaker group delay  
results. See Using Full Band Phase Control on page 64 for  
more on this.  
Check menu.  
2d.Standing Wave  
A/V RECEIVER  
1
Select ‘Group Delay’ from the MCACC Data Check  
Filter 1 Filter 2  
Filter 3  
ATT TRIM  
[dB] [dB]  
Filter  
Channel  
Freq ATT Freq ATT Freq  
Q
Q
Q
[Hz] [dB] [Hz] [dB] [Hz]  
menu.  
SW  
63 5.0 10 120 5.0 10 201 5.0 10 +10.0  
dB  
0
MCACC  
M1.MEMORY1  
2f.Group Delay  
A/V RECEIVER  
5
10  
Channel  
:
Front  
16  
32  
63  
125  
250  
500  
1k Hz  
Calibration:  
Before  
ms  
Exit  
Return  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
2.0  
1.4  
SB  
0.8  
0.2  
-0.4  
-1.0  
2
When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use / to  
200  
2k  
20k Hz  
select the channel for which you want to check  
standing wave control.  
Exit  
Return  
The standing wave related calibration value for the  
selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset  
and its graph are displayed.  
2
When ‘Channel’ is highlighted, use / to select  
the channel you want to check.  
The result of group delay calibration for the selected  
channel is displayed.  
3
Press  
to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use / to  
When measurements have been performed with Full  
Auto MCACC selected at Advanced MCACC or with ALL  
or Full Band Phase Ctrl selected when Auto MCACC is  
selected, the graph before group delay calibration is also  
displayed.  
select the MCACC preset you want to check.  
When After is selected at Calibration, the group delay  
after calibration is displayed. Compared to when Before  
is selected, with After there is less difference in the delay  
between frequency bands and the group delay between  
the different channels is uniform, allowing you to check  
the full band phase control effect.  
No Data is displayed if the selected group delay has not  
been measured.  
105  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
Output PC  
Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 2  
in Checking MCACC Data on page 104. The data  
measured with the Advanced MCACC function is  
Data Management  
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,  
allowing you to calibrate your system for different  
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the  
1
transmitted to the connected computer. The 3D graphs  
3
of the reverb characteristics and group delay  
characteristics before and after calibration and the  
MCACC results (parameters) can be checked.  
same listening position). This is useful for alternate  
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to  
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies  
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).  
1
Select ‘Output PC’ from MCACC Data Check menu  
From this menu you can copy from one preset to another,  
name presets for easier identification and clear any ones  
you don’t need.  
and press ENTER  
.
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the  
MCACC application on your PC shows on the GUI  
screen.  
1
Set the remote control to the receiver operation  
mode, then press HOME MENU  
.
2g.Output PC  
A/V RECEIVER  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
Start the MCACC application on your PC.  
2
Select ‘Data Management’ from the HOME MENU.  
Exit  
Cancel  
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
2
Start the MCACC application on your computer.  
1. Advanced MCACC  
a. Memory Rename  
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It  
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to  
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on  
your computer. The various parameters, the reverb  
characteristics and group delay characteristics data  
used for display on the computer are not cleared when  
the power is turned off. If the reverb characteristics are  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
2
• Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for  
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets  
below).  
re-measured, however, the data is overwritten.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the MCACC Data Check menu.  
Continue with other operations in the MCACC Data  
Check menu if necessary. Press RETURN again to exit  
the MCACC Data Check menu.  
• MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from one  
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC  
preset data below).  
• MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets  
that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on  
page 107).  
Note  
1 To transmit data, the receiver and computer must be connected using an RS-232C cable and a special application must be installed on the  
computer. See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 38 for more on this.  
2 Only one set of reverb characteristics is stored on the receiver. If you wish to compare several different measurement results, transmit the  
data to the computer each time reverb measurements are taken.  
3 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 42 or Automatic MCACC  
(Expert) on page 96, either of which you should have already completed.  
106  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Advanced MCACC menu  
11  
4
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.  
Renaming MCACC presets  
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES.  
If NO is selected, the memory is not copied.  
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re  
using, you may want to rename them for easier  
identification.  
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the  
MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically  
return to the Data Management setup menu.  
1
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
Clearing MCACC presets  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
3a.Memory Rename  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Memory Rename  
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
MCACC Position Rename  
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets  
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration  
settings of that preset.  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M5  
M6  
:
:
:
:
:
:
MEMORY 1  
MEMORY 2  
MEMORY 3  
MEMORY 4  
MEMORY 5  
MEMORY 6  
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
3c.MCACC Memory Clear  
A/V RECEIVER  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then  
a. Memory Rename  
Clear  
:
M1.MEMORY  
1
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
select an appropriate preset name.  
Use / to select the preset, then / to select a  
preset name.  
OK  
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Cancel  
then press RETURN when you’re finished.  
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.  
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
Copying MCACC preset data  
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration  
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 98), we  
recommend copying your current settings to an unused  
MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will  
3
Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.  
1
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES.  
If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared.  
give you a reference point from which to start.  
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the  
MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically  
return to the Data Management setup menu.  
1
Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
3.Data Management  
A/V RECEIVER  
3b.MCACC Memory Copy  
A/V RECEIVER  
a. Memory Rename  
b. MCACC Memory Copy  
c. MCACC Memory Clear  
Copy  
From  
To  
:
:
:
All Data  
M1.MEMORY  
M1.MEMORY  
1
1
OK  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Cancel  
2
3
Select the setting you want to copy.  
• All Data – Copies all the settings of the selected  
MCACC preset memory.  
• Level & Distance – Copies only the channel level and  
speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC  
preset memory.  
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the  
settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy  
them (‘To’).  
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
Note  
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 42 or Automatic MCACC  
(Expert) on page 96.  
107  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
12  
Chapter 12:  
The system and the other setup  
• Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of connection used  
for surround back terminals and the size, number  
distance and overall balance of the connected  
speakers (see Manual speaker setup below).  
Making receiver settings from the  
System Setup menu  
The following section describes how to change the  
speaker-related settings manually and make various  
other settings (input selection, OSD language selection,  
etc.).  
• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to  
the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see  
The Input Setup menu on page 44).  
• OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display language  
can be changed (see Changing the OSD display  
language (OSD Language) on page 42).  
AUDIO  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO  
PARAMETER  
ANT  
MPX  
PQLS  
MEMORY  
LIST  
TUNE TOOLS  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
INFO  
DISP  
CH  
TOP MENU  
BAND  
T.EDIT  
GUIDE  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OPE TV CTRL  
DVD  
TV  
BD  
CD  
DVR  
CD-R  
XM  
HDMI  
PRESET  
ENTER  
TUNE  
PRESET  
RETURN  
• Other Setup – Changes customized settings to  
reflect how you are using the receiver (see The Other  
Setup menu on page 112).  
HOME MEDIA  
GALLERY  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
CATEGORY  
HOME  
MENU  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
iPod USB TUNER  
SIRIUS  
MAIN  
iPod CTRL  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
1
Manual speaker setup  
Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.  
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to  
optimize the surround sound performance. You only need  
to make these settings once (unless you change the  
placement of your current speaker system or add new  
speakers).  
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,  
disconnect them.  
RECEIVER  
2
Press  
, then press HOME MENU.2  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
These settings are designed to customize your system,  
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 42, it isn’t  
necessary to make all of these settings.  
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME  
MENU.  
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU, then  
press ENTER  
.
CAUTION  
• The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are  
HOME MENU  
A/V RECEIVER  
output at high volume.  
1. Advanced MCACC  
2. MCACC Data Check  
3. Data Management  
4. System Setup  
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
above if you’re not already at this screen.  
Exit  
Return  
4.System Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
1. Surr Back System  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
6. THX Audio Setting  
4.System Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
Exit  
Return  
adjust these settings in order:  
Note  
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.  
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when either the HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM, SIRIUS or iPod/USB input function is selected or the  
headphones are connected. When you set ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 85), you can’t use the HOME MENU.  
108  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
12  
• Surr Back System – Specifies how you are using your  
surround back speakers (see below).  
3
When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.  
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.  
• Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and number of  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
speakers you’ve connected (see below).  
Speaker Setting  
• Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance of your  
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration  
speaker system (page 110).  
1
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency) . It is  
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto  
MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 42 are  
correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC  
presets, and cannot be set independently.  
• Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance of your  
speakers from the listening position (page 111).  
• X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker  
system for movie soundtracks (page 111).  
• THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you are  
using a THX speaker setup (page 111).  
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup  
3
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
menu.  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
4a2.Speaker Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
SB  
:
:
:
:
:
LARGE  
LARGE  
LARGE  
LARGE x 2  
YES  
Surround back speaker setting  
• Default setting: Normal  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
SW  
6. THX Audio Setting  
X.OVER  
:
80Hz  
There are several ways you can use the surround back  
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a  
normal home theater setup where they are used for the  
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping  
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system  
in another room.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set,  
then select a speaker size.  
Use / to select the size (and number) of each of the  
1
Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the Manual SP  
2
following speakers:  
Setup menu.  
• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you  
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send  
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
on page 108 if you’re not already at this screen.  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
4a1.Surr Back System  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
Normal  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker  
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center  
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to  
the front speakers).  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
:
:
:
:
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
6. THX Audio Setting  
SB  
OK  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
• Surr – Select LARGE if your surround speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect  
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the  
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a  
subwoofer).  
2
Select the surround back speaker setting.  
• Normal – Select for normal home theater use with  
surround back speakers in your main (speaker  
system A) setup.  
• Speaker B – Select to use the (surround back) B  
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in  
another room (see Switching the speaker system on  
page 84).  
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-  
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your  
speakers on page 23).  
• ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back) B  
speaker terminals for an independent system in  
another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on  
page 85).  
Note  
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.  
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center, surround and surround back  
speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.  
109  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
12  
• SB – Select the number of surround back speakers  
• AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves  
from speaker to speaker automatically.  
1
you have (one, two or none). Select LARGEx2 or  
LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce  
bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or  
SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect  
surround back speakers choose NO.  
3
Confirm your selected setup option.  
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.  
4a3.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
CAUTION  
Loud test tones will be output.  
• SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels  
set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when  
YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want  
the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or  
you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that  
would normally come out the front and center  
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did  
not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass  
frequencies are output from other speakers).  
Select ‘X.OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.3  
Please wait...**  
Exit  
Cancel  
4
Adjust the level of each channel using /.  
2
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch speakers.  
The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown  
on-screen:  
3
4a3.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
0.0 dB  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Exit  
Finish  
Channel Level  
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the  
overall balance of your speaker system, an important  
factor when setting up a home theater system.  
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is  
emitted.  
4
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
menu.  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
4a3.Channel Level  
A/V RECEIVER  
Tip  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
MCACC  
:
M1.MEMORY 1  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
• You can change the channel levels by set the remote  
Test Tone  
:
AUTO  
control to the receiver operation mode, then press CH  
6. THX Audio Setting  
5
LEVEL, and then using / on the remote control.  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
2
Select a setup option.  
• MANUAL – Move the test tone manually from  
speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel  
levels.  
Note  
1 • If you selected Speaker B, ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 109) you can’t adjust the surround back  
settings.  
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.  
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.  
2 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This  
may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in  
the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good  
results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears  
judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL  
for the front speakers.  
3 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds  
playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.  
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.  
4 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker  
to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).  
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.  
5 The channel level cannot be adjusted using this procedure while making settings on HOME MENU.  
110  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
12  
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and  
the X-Curve has no effect.  
Speaker Distance  
For good sound depth and separation from your system,  
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from  
the listening position. The receiver can then add the  
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
THX Audio Setting  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP  
This menu allows the user to adjust various THX features  
including Loudness Plus, SB Speaker Position, THX  
Select2 Subwoofer (on/off), and Boundary Gain Control.  
Please see page 129 for a details regarding these THX  
features.  
Setup menu.  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
4a4.Speaker Distance  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
L
C
R
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
10’10”  
9’10”  
10’10”  
9’00”  
10’00”  
10’00”  
9’00”  
1
Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP  
Setup menu.  
6. THX Audio Setting  
12’10”  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
2
Adjust the distance of each speaker using /  
.
1
6. THX Audio Setting  
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in /2 inch  
increments.  
Exit  
Return  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
2
Select either ON or OFF for THX Loudness Plus  
setting.  
Tip  
4a6.THX Audio Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround  
back speakers are the same distance from the  
listening position.  
Loudness Plus  
SB SP Position  
THX Select2 SW  
BGC  
:
:
:
:
ON  
4 ft<  
YES  
OFF  
X-Curve  
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright  
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting  
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater  
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie  
Exit  
Finish  
3
Specify the distance of your surround back speakers  
from each other.  
1
soundtracks.  
4a6.THX Audio Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Loudness Plus  
:
:
:
:
ON  
4 ft<  
YES  
OFF  
SB SP Position  
THX Select2 SW  
BGC  
4a.Manual SP Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. Surr Back System  
2. Speaker Setting  
3. Channel Level  
4. Speaker Distance  
5. X-Curve  
6. THX Audio Setting  
Exit  
Finish  
• 0–1 ft – Surround back speakers within 1 foot apart.  
Exit  
Return  
• >1–4 ft – Surround back speakers between 1 and 4  
feet apart.  
2
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.  
Use /to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed  
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at  
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope  
increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the  
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your  
room size:  
• 4 ft< – Surround back speakers more than 4 feet  
apart (default).  
Room size (ft2)  
≤400 ≤550 ≤650 ≤800 ≤2200 ≤12000  
X-Curve (dB/oct) –0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0  
Note  
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on  
page 58).  
111  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
12  
4
Specify whether your subwoofer is THX Select2  
certified or not.  
The Other Setup menu  
The Other Setup menu is where you can make  
customized settings to reflect how you are using the  
receiver.  
4a6.THX Audio Setting  
A/V RECEIVER  
Loudness Plus  
SB SP Position  
THX Select2 SW  
BGC  
:
:
:
:
ON  
4 ft<  
YES  
OFF  
RECEIVER  
, then press HOME MENU.  
1
Press  
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your  
TV. Use /// and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
Exit  
Finish  
If your subwoofer isn’t THX Select2 certified, but you still  
want to switch boundary gain compensation on, select  
YES here, but the effect might not work properly.  
2
3
Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME MENU  
.
Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER  
.
5
Select either ON or OFF for Boundary Gain  
Compensation (BGC) setting.  
4.SystemSetup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
a.Manual SP Setup  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
4a6.THX Audio Setting  
b. Input Setup  
c. OSD Language  
d. Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Loudness Plus  
SB SP Position  
THX Select2 SW  
BGC  
:
ON  
4 ft<  
YES  
OFF  
:
:
:
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
6
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
• KURO LINK Setup – Synchronizes this receiver with  
your Pioneer component supporting KURO LINK (see  
KURO LINK Setup on page 80).  
• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings for  
a multi-channel input (see below).  
• ZONE Audio Setup – Specifies the volume setting  
for a MULTI-ZONE setup (page 113).  
• Power ON Level Setup – Specifies the volume level  
set when the power is turned on (page 113).  
• Volume Limit Setup – Limits the maximum volume  
(page 113).  
• Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this receiver’s  
remote control mode (page 114).  
• Flicker Reduction – Adjusts the way the GUI screen  
looks (page 114).  
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
Multi Channel Input Setup  
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi-  
channel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is  
selected as an input function, you can display the video  
images of other input functions. In the Multi Channel  
Input Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-  
channel input.  
112  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
12  
1
Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup  
2
Select the volume level setting of ZONE 21 and  
ZONE 3  
menu.  
.
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a  
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is  
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be  
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully  
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX  
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that  
receiver’s volume controls.  
Exit  
Return  
2
Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.  
• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level  
originally recorded on the source.  
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this  
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is  
quite low in the sub zone at first, and then experiment to  
find the correct level.  
• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level  
increased by 10 dB.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
SW Input Gain  
Video Input  
:
:
0dB  
DVD  
Power ON Level Setup  
The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same  
level when the receiver’s power is turned on.  
1
Select ‘Power ON Level Setup’ from the Other  
Exit  
Finish  
Setup menu.  
3
Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.  
4d.Other Setup  
4d4.Power ON Level Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
When the multi-channel input is selected as an input  
function, you can display the video images of other input  
functions. The video input can be selected from the  
following: DVD, TV/SAT, DVR, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, OFF.  
Power ON Level  
: LAST  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
SW Input Gain  
Video Input  
:
:
+10dB  
DVD  
2
Select the Power ON Level setting you want.  
• LAST – When the power is turned on, the volume is  
set to the same level as when the power was last  
turned off.  
Exit  
Finish  
• “---” – When the power is turned on, the volume is set  
to minimum level.  
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
• –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to be set  
when the power is turned, in steps of 0.5 dB.  
ZONE Audio Setup  
It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the  
value specified at Volume Limit Setup.  
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see Using the  
MULTI-ZONE controls on page 85), you may need to  
specify your volume setting.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
1
Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the Other Setup  
menu.  
Volume Limit Setup  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4d3.ZONE Audio Setup  
Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The  
volume cannot be increased above the level set here,  
even by operating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial  
on the front panel).  
A/V RECEIVER  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
ZONE 2 Volume Level : Variable  
ZONE 3 Volume Level : Variable  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
Note  
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 109, you won’t be able to change the volume level.  
113  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The system and the other setup  
12  
1
Select ‘Volume Limit Setup’ from the Other Setup  
1
Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the Other  
menu.  
Setup menu.  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4d5.Volume Limit Setup  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4d7.Flicker Reduction Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
A/V RECEIVER  
Volume Limit  
:
OFF  
Flicker Reduction  
:
4
1. KURO LINK Setup  
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Finish  
2
3
Select the Volume Limit setting you want.  
• OFF – The maximum volume is not limited.  
2
3
Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.  
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
• –20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum volume is  
limited to the value set here.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
When you’re finished, press RETURN  
.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
Remote Control Mode Setup  
• Default setting: 1  
This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent  
erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver  
1
are being used.  
1
Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the  
Other Setup menu.  
4d.Other Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
4d6.Remote Control Mode Setup  
A/V RECEIVER  
Remote Control Mode  
:
1
1. KURO LINK Setup  
2. Multi Ch In Setup  
3. ZONE Audio Setup  
4. Power ON Level Setup  
5. Volume Limit Setup  
6. Remote Control Mode Setup  
7. Flicker Reduction Setup  
OK  
Exit  
Return  
Exit  
Cancel  
2
3
4
Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.  
Select “OK” to change the remote control mode.  
Follow the instructions on the screen to change the  
remote control’s setting.  
See Operating multiple receivers (page 89).  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
Flicker Reduction Setup  
• Default setting: 4  
The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased. If you feel  
the GUI screen is hard to see, try changing this setting.  
Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the  
GUI screen; it has no influence on the video output.  
Note  
1 If you change this receiver’s setting, also change the setting on the remote control.  
114  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Chapter 13:  
Additional information  
Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height  
of the ears.  
Speaker Setting Guide  
In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is  
important to accurately position the speakers and make  
their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to  
finely focus the multi-channel sound.  
Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation  
If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same  
direction, the tone will not be the same on the right and  
left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced  
properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed towards  
the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped.  
Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research Group  
has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be  
achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area  
30 cm (12 inches) to 80 cm (31 inches) behind the  
listening position (between the surround speakers and  
the listening position).  
The three major elements in positioning the speakers are  
distance, angle and orientation (the direction in which  
the speakers are pointing).  
Distance: The distance of all the speakers should be  
equal.  
Angle: The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical.  
Orientation: The orientation should be horizontally  
symmetrical.  
However, the sense of sound positioning can differ  
according to the conditions in the room and the speakers  
being used. In smaller environments in particular (when  
the front speakers are close to the listening position),  
with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward.  
We suggest you use this example of installation as  
reference when trying out different installation methods.  
In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this  
environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is  
possible to automatically correct the speaker distance  
1
electrically to a precision of /2 inch using the Auto  
MCACC Setup function (page 42). For the volume and  
sound quality as well, accurate sound field correction  
using the equalizer and speaker phase characteristic  
correction using the Full Band Phase Control function  
(page 63) together make it possible to achieve the ideal  
listening environment.  
Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer  
Placing the subwoofer between the center and front  
speakers makes even music sources sound more natural  
(If there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter if it is  
placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound  
output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is  
no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is  
placed on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not  
cancel out the bass sound output from the other  
speakers. Also note that placing it near a wall may result  
in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could  
excessively amplify the bass sound.  
Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment  
Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers  
are steady, and leave at least 10 cm (4 inches) from the  
surrounding walls. Position the speakers attentively so  
that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles  
from the listening position (center of the adjustments).  
(We recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the  
layout.) Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant  
from the listening position.  
If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at  
an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This  
can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but  
depending on the shape of the room this could result in  
standing waves. However, even if standing waves are  
generated, their influence on the sound quality can be  
prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave  
control function (page 105).  
Tip  
• If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a  
circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance  
correction and Fine Speaker Distance functions to  
make them equalize the distance artificially.  
Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC  
Setup (auto sound field correction) function  
It is more effective to perform the Auto MCACC Setup  
(page 42) procedure once the adjustments described  
above have been completed.  
Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height  
Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.  
Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid  
and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.  
If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as  
the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point it  
to the listening position.  
115  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Position of center speaker and monitor  
Tip  
Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker,  
keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the  
screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs  
using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center  
speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point  
it towards the listening position.  
• The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger  
than the distance actually measured with a tape  
measure, etc. This is because this distance is  
corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.  
Positional relationship between speakers  
and monitor  
Installation on floor  
(Diagram as seen  
from the side)  
Position of front speakers and monitor  
The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible  
to the monitor.  
Monitor  
Monitor  
L
R
• If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install  
it away from the TV.  
45° to 60°  
• When installing the center speaker on top of the  
monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards  
the listening position.  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.  
Note  
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug  
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
Power  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on.  
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.  
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.  
Power cannot be turned off.  
(ZONE 2 ON or ZONE 3 ON is  
• Set the remote control’s MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE 3, then press  
RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off.  
displayed.)  
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of  
off or the PHASE CONTROL  
wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.  
indicator blinks.  
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized  
independent service company.  
During loud playback the  
• Turn down the volume.  
power suddenly switches off.  
• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 98.  
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press  
STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use / to select D.SAFETY OFF,  
and then use /to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY OFFto deactivate this feature). If the power  
switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be  
unavailable.  
116  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The unit does not respond  
• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.  
when the buttons are pressed.  
• Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.  
AMP ERR blinks in the display, • Try tuning on the power after 1 minute.  
then the power automatically  
switches off. The power  
indicator blinks and the power  
does not turn on.  
AMP ERR blinks in the display, • The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Unplug the receiver  
then the power automatically from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.  
switches off. The ADVANCED  
MCACC blinks and the power  
does not turn on.  
The PQLS indicator flashes and • There is a problem with the receiver’s fan. Try turning on the power. If the same thing happens, the  
power turns off. FAN STOP is receiver is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent  
displayed.  
service company.  
The ADVANCED MCACC  
indicator flashes and power  
turns off.  
• There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit. The receiver may have a serious problem. Unplug  
the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.  
AMP OVERHEAT (or  
OVERHEAT) and the power  
indicator flash and the power  
turns off.  
• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.  
• Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.  
The Receiver suddenly power • The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized  
off or the blue indicator at the independent service company.  
center of the receiver flashes.  
Display blinks 12V TRG ERR. • An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on.  
No sound  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound is output when an  
input function is selected.  
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).  
• Make sure the correct input function is selected.  
No sound output from the front  
speakers.  
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.  
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when PCM is  
selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.  
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 17).  
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 21).  
No sound from the surround or • Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected;  
center speakers.  
select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 57).  
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 109).  
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 110).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 21).  
No sound from surround back • Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on  
speakers.  
page 109).  
• Make sure surround back channel processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel  
processing on page 61).  
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with  
surround back channel processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back  
speakers. In this case, set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 61).  
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back channel  
processing is set to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on  
page 57).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 21).  
If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker  
terminal.  
117  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound from subwoofer.  
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.  
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.  
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 109).  
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of  
your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 109).  
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings  
to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on  
page 109).  
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options  
on page 82).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 110).  
No sound from one speaker.  
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 21).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 110).  
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 109).  
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening  
mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 57).  
Sound is produced from  
analog components, but not  
from digital ones (DVD, LD,  
CD-ROM, etc.).  
• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 63).  
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected  
to (see The Input Setup menu on page 44).  
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input function.  
No sound is output or a noise is • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.  
output when Dolby Digital/DTS  
software is played back.  
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set  
to On.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
No sound when using the  
• If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the HOME MENU.  
HOME MENU.  
Other audio problems  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Broadcast stations cannot be For FM broadcasts  
selected automatically, or  
there is considerable noise in  
radio broadcasts.  
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 34).  
For AM broadcasts  
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 34).  
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor,  
etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.  
A multichannel DVD source  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog  
appears to be downmixed to 2 inputs on page 47).  
channels during playback.  
Noise is output when scanning • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital  
a DTS CD.  
information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when  
scanning.  
When playing a DTS format LD • Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 63).  
there is audible noise on the  
soundtrack.  
Can’t record audio.  
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an  
analog source.  
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.  
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting  
other audio components on page 32).  
Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see  
Speaker Setting on page 109).  
118  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Everything seems to be set up • The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the  
correctly, but the playback  
sound is odd.  
receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the  
speakers on page 21).  
The PHASE CONTROL feature • If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is  
doesn’t seem to have an  
audible effect.  
set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or  
depending on the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).  
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on  
page 111).  
Noise or hum can be heard  
even when there is no sound  
being input.  
• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source  
are not causing interference.  
There seems to be a time lag • See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on  
between the speakers and the page 42 to set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in  
output of the subwoofer.  
the subwoofer output).  
The maximum volume  
• Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Limit Setup on page 113).  
available (shown in the front  
panel display) is lower than the  
+12dB maximum.  
Some of the input functions  
• Make sure that the function is set to ON at the Input Skip function on the Input Setup menu  
cannot be selected using the (page 44).  
INPUT SELECTOR on the front  
dial or INPUT SELECT on  
remote control.  
• Make sure that HDMI Input on the Input Setup menu is set to OFF (page 44).  
Video  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No image is output when an  
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 30).  
input is selected.  
• For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another component are  
connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on page 83), you must connect your TV  
to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video,  
HDMI or S-Video cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 44).  
• Check the video output settings of the source component.  
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.  
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If  
adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 83) and/or the  
resolution settings on your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video  
Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 83) OFF.  
Can’t record video.  
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.  
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video  
cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to  
this receiver.  
Noisy, intermittent, or distorted • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the  
picture.  
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may  
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect  
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or  
composite), then start playback again.  
Video signals are not output  
• When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component terminal  
from the component terminal. and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, the video signals may not be output to the  
monitor connected to the component terminal. If this happens, do the following:  
– Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.  
– Set RES on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu to PURE (page 83).  
119  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Settings  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The Auto MCACC Setup  
continually shows an error.  
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see  
also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 44). If the noise level cannot be kept low  
enough, you will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 108).  
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single)  
terminals.  
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the  
surround back channel.  
• Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.  
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:  
– The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections.  
– If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that  
affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify  
the polarity.  
–
Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse Phase may be  
displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.  
After using the Auto MCACC • There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc.  
Setup, the speaker size setting Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.  
is incorrect.  
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some  
cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 109, and use the ALL (Keep  
SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 96 if this is a  
recurring problem.  
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker • Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are  
Distance setting (page 100)  
matched up properly).  
properly.  
The display shows KEY LOCK  
ON when you try to make  
settings.  
• With the receiver in standby, press STANDBY/ON while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the  
key lock.  
Most recent settings have been • The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.  
erased.  
• Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones before unplugging the  
power cord.  
The various system settings are • After all the zones have been turned off, make sure the blue STANDBY/ON light has gone out  
not stored. before unplugging.  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The EQ response displayed in • There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto  
the graphical output following MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal  
calibration does not appear  
sound.  
entirely flat.  
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment  
needed.  
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.  
EQ adjustments made using  
• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these  
the Manual MCACC setup on adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the  
page 98 do not appear to  
filters dedicated to overall system calibration.  
change the graphical output.  
Lower frequency response  
curves do not seem to have  
been calibrated for SMALL  
speakers.  
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers  
that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.  
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable  
sound is output for display.  
120  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Display  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The display is dark or off.  
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
After making an adjustment  
the display goes off.  
You can’t get DIGITAL to  
display when using SIGNAL  
SEL.  
• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The  
Input Setup menu on page 44).  
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input function.  
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not • These indicators does not light if playback is paused.  
light when playing Dolby/DTS  
software.  
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.  
When playing Dolby Digital or • Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.  
DTS sources, the receiver’s  
format indicators do not light.  
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 63).  
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.  
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.  
When playing certain discs,  
none of the receiver’s format  
indicators light.  
• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what  
audio tracks are recorded on the disc.  
When playing a disc with the • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 63).  
listening mode set to Auto  
Surround or ALC, 2 PL II or  
Neo:6 appear on the receiver.  
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is  
not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.  
During playback of a Surround • The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1  
EX or DTS-ES source on the compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 61), then switch  
SBch AUTO setting, EX or ES to the THX Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 57).  
does not appear, or the signal  
is not properly processed.  
During playback of DVD-Audio, • This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a  
the display shows PCM.  
malfunction.  
The power turns off  
• See the Power section (page 116).  
automatically and some  
indicator flashes, or some  
indicator flashes and the power  
does not turn on.  
Remote control  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Cannot be remote controlled. • Set a 5-digit preset code corresponding to the receiver to be operated in the remote control (see  
Operating multiple receivers on page 89).  
• Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote Control Mode Setup  
on page 114).  
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 11).  
• Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 feet) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see  
Operating range of remote control unit on page 11).  
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.  
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.  
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this  
unit’s sensor on page 37).  
Other components can’t be  
operated with the system  
remote.  
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.  
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.  
121  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
HDMI  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The HDMI indicator blinks  
• Check all the points below.  
continuously.  
No picture or sound.  
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-  
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-Video or composite video  
jacks.  
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver  
(even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-Video or composite  
video jacks between source and receiver.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,  
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
• If video images do not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep Color  
or other setting for your component.  
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio  
output.  
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to  
THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog  
audio connection.  
• To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI™ Cable) to connect this  
receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color feature.  
No picture.  
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 83).  
• Set the HDMI output setting to the connected HDMI OUT terminal (in Switching the HDMI output  
on page 87).  
No sound, or sound suddenly • Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.  
ceases.  
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.  
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.  
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.  
Noisy or distorted picture.  
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the  
video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may  
also depend on the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect  
the source and display device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or  
composite), then start playback again.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor,  
please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
HDCP ERROR shows in the  
display.  
• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible  
with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-Video  
or composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be  
displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.  
122  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Amp-linked operation not  
possible using KURO LINK  
function.  
• Check the HDMI connections.  
• The cable may be damaged.  
• Select ON for the KURO LINK setting (see KURO LINK Setup on page 80).  
• Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.  
• Set the TV side KURO LINK setting to ON.  
• Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to HDMI OUT 1. Then turn  
on first the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.  
Important information regarding the HDMI connection  
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-  
equipped component you are connecting–check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).  
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please try one of the  
following configurations when connecting up.  
Configuration A  
Configuration B  
Use component video cables to connect the video output  
of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s  
component video input. The receiver can then convert the  
analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal  
for transmission to the display. For this configuration,  
use the most convenient connection (digital is  
recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the  
operating instructions for more on audio connections.  
Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the  
display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most  
convenient connection (digital is recommended) for  
sending audio to the receiver. See the operating  
instructions for more on audio connections. Set the  
display volume to minimum when using this  
configuration.  
Note  
Note  
• If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can  
only receive HDMI video from the connected  
component.  
• The picture quality will change slightly during  
conversion.  
• Depending on the component, audio output may be  
limited to the number of channels available from the  
connected display unit (for example audio output is  
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio  
limitations).  
• If you want to switch the input function, you’ll have to  
switch functions on both the receiver and your  
display unit.  
• Since the sound is muted on the display when using  
the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on  
the display every time you switch input functions.  
HOME MEDIA GALLERY  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
Cannot access the network.  
The LAN cable is not firmly connected.  
Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 67).  
The router is not switched on.  
Switch on the router.  
Internet security software is currently installed in There are cases where a component with Internet  
the connected component. security software installed cannot be accessed.  
The audio component on the network which has Switch on the audio component on the network  
been switched off is switched on.  
before switching on this receiver.  
Playback does not start while The component is currently disconnected from  
‘Connecting...’ continues to this receiver or the power supply.  
be displayed.  
Check whether the component is properly  
connected to this receiver or the power supply.  
123  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
The PC or Internet radio is not The corresponding IP address is not properly set. Switch on the built-in DHCP server function of  
properly operated.  
your router, or set up the network manually  
according to your network environment (page 74).  
The IP address is being automatically configured. The automatic configuration process takes time.  
Please wait.  
The audio files stored on  
components on the network, installed on your PC.  
Windows Media Player 11 is not currently  
Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC  
(page 67).  
such as a PC, cannot be  
played back.  
Audio files were recorded in formats other than Play back audio files recorded in MP3, WAV  
MP3, WAV (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, and (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, or WMA. Note  
WMA.  
that some audio files recorded in these formats  
may not be played back on this receiver.  
Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC are Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC  
being played back on Windows Media Player 11 or cannot be played back on Windows Media Player  
Windows Media Connect.  
11 or Windows Media Connect. Try using another  
server. Refer to the operation manual supplied  
with your server.  
The component connected to the network is not Check whether the component is affected by  
properly operated.  
special circumstances or is in the sleep mode.  
Try rebooting the component if necessary.  
The component connected to the network does Try changing the settings for the component  
not permit file sharing. connected to the network.  
The folder stored on the component connected to Check the folder stored on the component  
the network has been deleted or damaged. connected to the network.  
Cannot access the  
component connected to the properly set.  
network.  
The component connected to the network is not If the client is automatically authorized, you need  
to enter the corresponding information again.  
Check whether the connection status is set to “Do  
not authorize”.  
There are no playable audio files on the  
component connected to the network.  
Check the audio files stored on the component  
connected to the network.  
Audio playback is undesirably The audio file currently being played back was not Check whether the audio file was recorded in a  
stopped or disturbed.  
recorded in a format playable on this receiver.  
format supported by this receiver.  
Check whether the folder has been damaged or  
corrupted.  
Note that there are cases where even the audio  
files listed as playable on this receiver cannot be  
played back or displayed (page 73).  
The LAN cable is currently disconnected.  
Connect the LAN cable properly (page 67).  
There is heavy traffic on the network with the  
Internet being accessed on the same network.  
Use 100BASE-TX to access the components on  
the network.  
Cannot access Windows  
Media Player 11.  
You are currently logged onto the domain through Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the  
your PC with Windows XP installed.  
local machine (page 69).  
Cannot listen to Internet radio The firewall settings for components on the  
Check the firewall settings for components on the  
network.  
stations  
network are currently in operation.  
You are currently disconnected from the Internet. Check the connection settings for components on  
the network, and consult with your network  
service provider if necessary (page 74).  
The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are There are cases where you cannot listen to some  
stopped or interrupted.  
Internet radio stations even when they are listed in  
the list of Internet radio stations on this receiver  
(page 70 and 125).  
The Home Media Gallery  
cannot be operated with the Home Media Gallery mode.  
buttons on the remote control.  
The remote control is not currently set to the  
Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to set the remote  
control to the Home Media Gallery mode  
(page 69).  
124  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
About status messages  
Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Home Media Gallery.  
Status messages  
Please Wait  
Descriptions  
A component on the network, including a PC, is currently being connected. Wait for a while.  
The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed.  
Cannot be played back for some reasons.  
Connection Down  
File Format Error  
Track Not Found  
Server Error  
The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network.  
The selected server cannot be accessed.  
Server Disconnected  
empty  
The server has been disconnected.  
There are no files stored in the selected folder.  
Preset Not Stored  
Out of Range  
The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved.  
The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings.  
The license for the contents to be played back is invalid.  
License Error  
Item Already Exists  
This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites folder has  
already been registered.  
Favorite List Full  
This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites folder but the  
Favorites folder is already full.  
USB interface  
Symptoms  
Causes  
Remedies  
The folders/files stored on a  
The folders/files are currently stored in a region Store the folders/files in the FAT region.  
USB memory device are not other than the FAT (File Allocation Table) region.  
displayed.  
The number of levels in a folder is more than 8.  
Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to  
8 (page 49).  
There are more than 30 000 folders/files stored in Limit the maximum number of folders/files stored  
a USB memory device.  
in a USB memory device to 30 000 (page 49).  
The audio files are copyrighted.  
Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory  
device cannot be played back (page 49).  
A USB memory device is not The USB memory device does not support the  
Try using a USB memory device compatible with  
the mass storage class specifications. Note that  
there are cases where even the audio files stored  
on a USB memory device compatible with the  
mass storage class specifications are not played  
back on this receiver (page 49).  
recognized.  
mass storage class specifications.  
Some formats of a USB memory device, including Check whether the format of your USB memory  
NTFS, and HFS, cannot be played back on this  
receiver.  
device is either FAT 12, FAT 16 or FAT 32. Note that  
the NTFS, and HFS formats cannot be played back  
on this receiver (page 49).  
The USB memory device is not connected  
properly.  
Check the USB memory device connection, then  
switch on this receiver (page 40).  
A USB hub is currently being used.  
This receiver does not support a USB hub  
(page 49).  
This receiver recognizes the USB memory device Switch off and on again this receiver.  
as a fraud.  
A USB memory device is  
The file format cannot be properly played back on See the list of file formats that can be played back  
connected and displayed, but this receiver.  
the audio files stored on the  
USB memory device cannot  
be played back.  
on this receiver (page 51).  
125  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
XM radio messages  
Status messages  
Check XM Tuner  
Cause  
Action  
The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed or not fully seated Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock  
in the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM Mini-  
Tuner Dock is not connected to this receiver.  
and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cable is  
connected to this receiver.  
Check Antenna  
Loading  
The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-  
Tuner Home Dock or the XM antenna cable is  
damaged.  
Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to  
the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the  
antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna  
if the cable is damaged.  
The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or program  
information from the XM satellite signal. This  
message can also occur in weak XM signal  
conditions.  
This message should disappear in a few seconds in  
good signal conditions.  
If you see this message often, reposition the XM  
antenna for better signal reception.  
Note that this receiver may not respond to some  
buttons while this message is displayed.  
Use the Antenna Aiming option to optimize the  
antenna position.  
No Signal  
The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the  
signal. Something may be blocking the XM XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the  
antenna’s view of the satellites or the antenna is not Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna  
properly aimed.  
position.  
See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner  
and Home Dock for antenna installation  
information.  
Off Air  
The XM channel you selected is not currently  
Check back later.  
broadcasting.  
CH Unauthorized  
You selected an XM channel that is blocked or  
cannot be received with your XM subscription  
package.  
Consult the latest channel guide at  
www.xmradio.com for the current list of channels.  
For information on receiving this channel, visit  
www.xmradio.com or contact XM Satellite Radio at  
1-800-967-2346.  
CH Unavailable  
The selected channel is not available. The channel Consult the latest channel guide at  
may have been reassigned to a different channel  
number.  
www.xmradio.com for the current list of channels.  
For cases of a new radio or a radio that has not  
received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow  
the radio to receive the XM satellite signal for at least  
5 minutes and then try to select the channel again.  
This message may occur initially with a new radio or  
a radio that has not received XM’s signal for an  
extended period.  
– – – – – – – –  
No artist name or song title is available for this  
No action required.  
selection.  
Upgrade XM Tuner  
The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. This Contact XM Listener Care (1-800-967-2346) and ask  
receiver features advanced technology that is  
designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner.  
about upgrading your XM CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-  
Tuner.  
Have this receiver’s model name and CNP-1000 XM  
Radio ID number ready beforehand, and explain that  
this receiver is displaying the message Upgrade XM  
Tuner.  
If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner connected and  
you see this message, turn off this receiver, make  
sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the  
Mini-Tuner Home Dock, and then turn this receiver  
on again. If the message reappears, contact XM  
Listener Care and explain the issue that you’re  
experiencing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.  
XM Power Error  
A short-circuit occurring in the antenna or  
surrounding antenna cable.  
Make sure that there is nothing unusual with the  
antenna or antenna cable. Switch the power off,  
then back on again.  
126  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
SIRIUS radio messages  
Status messages  
Antenna Error  
Cause  
Action  
The SIRIUS antenna is not properly  
Check that the antenna cable is attached securely.  
connected.  
Check Sirius Tuner  
Acquiring Signal  
The SiriusConnect™ tuner is not properly  
connected.  
Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC Adapter are  
attached securely.  
The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the current Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the  
location.  
SIRIUS antenna to get better signal reception. Use the  
Antenna Aiming option to optimize the antenna position.  
Subscription Updating  
Updating Channels  
Invalid Channel  
Unit is updating subscription.  
Wait until the encryption code has been updated.  
Wait until the encryption code has been updated.  
Select another channel.  
Unit is updating channels.  
Selected channel is not available/does not  
exist.  
Firmware Updating  
The SiriusConnect™ tuner’s firmware is  
Wait for updating to finish.  
being updated.  
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the  
remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:  
• Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.  
• If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10 seconds. The  
power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared.)  
Surround sound formats  
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound  
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and  
terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended)  
is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a  
surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/  
right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for  
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as  
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.  
Dolby  
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See  
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby  
Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using  
the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system  
extracts surround sound from sources as follows:  
Dolby Digital  
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono  
surround) from any stereo source  
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding  
system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD  
and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six  
discrete audio channels, comprising five full range  
channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects)  
channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects;  
hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.  
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo  
surround) from any stereo source  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound  
(stereo surround and surround back) from two  
channel or 5.1 (and 6.1) channel sources  
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital  
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,  
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit  
rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog  
Normalization, attenuates programs based on the  
average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak  
level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve  
uniform playback level.  
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver.  
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds  
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,  
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for  
enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.  
127  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Dolby Digital Plus  
DTS  
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio  
technology for all high-definition programming and  
media. It combines the efficiency to meet future  
broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to  
realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming  
high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multi-  
channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts  
worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next-  
generation A/V receivers but remains fully compatible  
with all current A/V receivers.  
The DTS technologies are explained below. See  
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.  
DTS Digital Surround  
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding  
system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video,  
DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and  
video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio  
channels, comprising five full range channels, including  
an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved  
through the use of a low compression rate, and high  
rates of transmittance during playback.  
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs  
of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs  
in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate  
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate  
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps  
on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams  
for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby  
Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound  
originally intended by directors and producers.  
DTS-ES  
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a  
decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES  
Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.  
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with  
a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel.  
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed  
into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are  
also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel  
decoder.  
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete  
channel output, interactive mixing and streaming  
capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-  
Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital  
connection is possible for high-definition audio and video.  
Dolby TrueHD  
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding  
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in  
the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing  
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,  
unlocking the true high-definition entertainment  
experience on high-definition optical discs in the next  
generation. When coupled with high-definition video,  
Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater  
experience with stunning sound and high-definition  
picture.  
DTS Neo:6  
DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround sound  
from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV)  
and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel  
information already encoded into the source, as well as  
its own processing to determine channel localization  
(with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver). Two  
modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS  
Neo:6 with two channel sources.  
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8  
full-range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz  
audio. It also features extensive metadata including  
dialogue normalization and dynamic range control.  
Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a  
single-cable digital connection is possible for high-  
definition audio and video.  
DTS 96/24  
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital  
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio  
using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully  
backward compatible with all existing decoders. This  
means that DVD players can play this software using a  
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.  
HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their  
maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas  
Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than  
eight audio channels.  
DTS-EXPRESS  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology  
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer  
rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD  
DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting  
the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and  
memory audio contents.  
128  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master  
audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners  
without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD  
Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates,  
facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps  
in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD  
format, which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These  
high data transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96  
kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating  
the quality of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is  
an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound  
faithfully as intended by the creator of music or movies.  
About THX  
The THX technologies are explained below. See  
www.thx.com for more detailed information.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s:  
5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;  
6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 &  
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is  
a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD  
and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc. ©  
1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a  
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft  
Corporation.  
•
THX Cinema processing  
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by  
THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your  
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your  
home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.  
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called  
dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres  
with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then  
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not  
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX  
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate  
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,  
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,  
when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added  
in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
About iPod  
•
Re-Equalization  
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and  
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because  
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie  
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization  
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in  
a small home environment.  
“Made for iPod” means that an electronic accessory has  
been designed to connect specifically to iPod and has  
been certified by the developer to meet Apple  
performance standards.  
•
Timbre Matching  
“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic accessory  
has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone and  
has been certified by the developer to meet Apple  
performance standards.  
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the  
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is  
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all  
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the  
side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information  
going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the  
tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This  
ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers.  
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or  
its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and  
other countries. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.  
129  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to THX  
Select2™ specifications.  
•
Adaptive Decorrelation  
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create  
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre  
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround  
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and  
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest  
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive  
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and  
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This  
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—  
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.  
•
THX Music  
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be  
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround  
channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital  
and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.  
•
THX Games  
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX  
Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing  
is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game  
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately  
places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360  
degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives  
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.  
•
THX Select2 Plus  
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 Plus  
certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a  
rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a  
product feature the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee  
that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb  
performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus requirements  
cover every aspect of the product including pre-amplifier and power  
amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other  
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.  
•
THX Loudness Plus Description  
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in  
THX Select2 Plus™ Certified amplifiers. With THX Loudness Plus,  
home theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a  
surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of turning the  
volume below Reference Level is that certain sound elements can be  
lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX Loudness Plus  
compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the  
volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround  
channel levels and frequency response. This enables users to  
experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume  
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in  
any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX  
Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus  
settings for each type of content.  
•
THX Surround EX  
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development  
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film  
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX  
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been  
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called  
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the  
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,  
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel  
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the  
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the  
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home  
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the  
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be  
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.  
•
THX Select2 Cinema  
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers  
giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode,  
ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back  
surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and  
directional surround sounds.  
Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX  
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this  
new technology in the home.  
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during  
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital  
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the  
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may  
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the  
tastes of the individual listener.  
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX  
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2  
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.  
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital  
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that  
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select  
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema  
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.  
•
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)  
•
THX Select2 Music  
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed  
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal  
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater  
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround  
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and  
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together  
facing the front of the room will provide the largest sweet spot. If for  
practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers  
apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the  
setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which  
will re-optimize the surround sound-field.  
For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Select2 Music mode  
should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the  
surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS,  
Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear  
soundstage.  
•
THX Select2 Games  
For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX  
Select2 Games mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA  
processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0  
encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital.  
This accurately places all game audio surround information,  
providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Select2 Games  
mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all  
points of the surround field.  
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 CINEMA, THX Select2  
MUSIC and THX Select2 GAMES.  
•
Boundary Gain Compensation™  
Depending on the listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener  
may experience an excessive bass effect. This feature compensates  
for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect. This feature  
THX, the THX logo and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which  
may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other  
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
130  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
About Neural – THX Surround  
About SIRIUS and XM  
®
Neural-THX Surround is taking surround sound to the next level. This  
revolutionary new technology delivers the rich envelopment and  
discrete image detail of surround sound in a format that is fully  
compatible with stereo from various content sources. Neural-THX  
Surround enables 5.1, 6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies  
and digital music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by  
other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep ambience  
and subtle details of movies, music and games.  
Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official surround sound  
format for XM Satellite Radio’s “XM HD Surround,” TV sports  
broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well as  
leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And with this technology  
being used by sound designers during content creation, as well as  
embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX Surround promises a  
listening experience that is true to the original mix.  
For additional information, please visit www.neuralsurround.com.  
This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio  
Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER Corporation hereby grants the user  
a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of use to this product  
under USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology or  
trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural  
Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and  
logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX  
Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius  
XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the  
property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and  
XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee  
may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold  
separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio  
service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited  
to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate  
or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated  
in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio  
Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.  
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM  
Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available  
in Alaska and Hawaii.  
Record the SiriusConnect™ tuner ID below for reference.  
Record the XM Radio ID below for reference.  
Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.  
131  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
About FLAC  
13  
FLAC Decoder  
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,  
2007 Josh Coalson  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with  
or without modification, are permitted provided that the  
following conditions are met:  
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above  
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer.  
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the  
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or  
other materials provided with the distribution.  
• Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the  
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or  
promote products derived from this software without  
specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT  
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR  
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON  
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY  
OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
132  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats  
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see  
Using Stream Direct on page 60) you have selected.  
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats  
Input signal format  
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected  
Dolby Digital Surround  
Auto Surround / ALC / DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
Stereo playback  
As above  
DTS Surround  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
SACD sources  
As above  
As above  
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
Stereo playback  
As above  
DTS Surround  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
SACD sources  
As above  
As above  
As above  
Multichannel signal formats  
Input signal format  
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected  
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)  
Auto Surround / ALC  
Dolby Digital EX  
PURE DIRECT / DIRECT  
Dolby Digital EX  
a
a
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)  
DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)  
DTS-HD sources  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS+Neo:6  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Straight decoding  
As above  
Straight decoding  
As above  
Other 6.1/7.1 channel sources  
Other 5.1 channel sources  
As above  
Dolby Digital EX  
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE  
As above  
a
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected  
DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM  
Straight decoding  
As above  
Straight decoding  
As above  
SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)  
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources  
As above  
As above  
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
133  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Specifications  
13  
Integrated control section  
Control (SR) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
Control (IR) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
IR signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)  
12 V Trigger terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)  
12 V Trigger output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 V, Total 50 mA  
RS-232C cable type . . . . . . . 9-pin, cross type, female-female  
Amplifier section  
Continuous average power output of 140 watts* per  
channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
with no more than 0.09 %** total harmonic  
distortion.  
Miscellaneous  
Multi channel simultaneous power output (1 kHz, 1 %, 8 Ω)  
7 ch total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 W  
Continuous Power Output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω, 0.09 %)  
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W + 140 W  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W + 140 W  
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W + 140 W  
Continuous Power Output (1 kHz, 6 Ω, 1.0 %)  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 W  
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.4 W (KURO LINK OFF)  
0.6 W (KURO LINK ON)  
Dimensions . . . . . . 420 (W) mm x 200 (H) mm x 460 (D) mm  
(16 9/16 (W) in. x 7 7/8 (H) in. x 18 1/8 (D) in.)  
Weight (without package) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 kg (40.8 lb)  
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W + 180 W  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W + 180 W  
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 W + 180 W  
Total harmonic distortion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 %  
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 130 W, 8 Ω)  
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s  
Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers  
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer  
Furnished Parts Number  
MCACC Setup microphone (APM7009) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Remote control unit (AXD7542) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AA/IEC R6 dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
iPod cable (ADE7129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AM loop antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Power cord (ADG7111) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
These operating instructions  
Audio Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 mV/47 kΩ  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 mV/47 kΩ  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 dB  
Note  
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
Cleaning the unit  
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and  
dirt.  
Tuner Section  
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth  
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six  
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe  
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or  
cleansers.  
Frequency Range (FM). . . . . . . . . . . . . .87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Antenna Input (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced  
Frequency Range (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530 kHz to 1700 kHz  
Antenna (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna (balanced)  
Video Section  
Signal level  
Composite/S-Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Component Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω),  
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or  
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will  
corrode the surface.  
Corresponding maximum resolution  
Component Video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1080p (1125p)  
(Video convert off)  
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licensed by NEC corporation.  
FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation  
Digital In/Out Section  
HDMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (Not DVI)  
HDMI output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 V, 100 mA  
USB terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)  
iPod terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB, and Video (Composite)  
SIRIUS antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-pin mini DIN cable  
Network Section  
LAN terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX  
134  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
Index  
Dynamic Range Control 82  
Numerics  
12V trigger 38  
E
Effect 83  
A
Acoustic Cal EQ 105  
Acoustic Calibration EQ 82  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust 101  
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional 101  
Advanced MCACC 95–107  
Output PC 38, 106  
Advanced surround 59  
Analog attenuator 86  
Aspect 84  
Audio cable 24  
AUDIO PARAMETER 82  
Auto delay 83  
Auto level control (ALC) 57, 133  
Auto MCACC 96  
F
Fine Channel Level 99  
Fine Speaker Distance 100  
Flicker Reduction 114  
Front Stage Surround Advance 60  
Full Band Phase Control 42, 63  
H
HDCP 29  
HDMI 26–29, 39, 46, 79–81, 87, 122  
HDMI Audio 83  
Hue 84  
Auto surround 57, 133  
I
Input function 46  
Default and possible settings 45  
Input Setup 44–45  
Input signal 63  
iPod 40, 47–48, 129  
Switching controls 48  
IR jack 37  
B
Bass 82  
Bi-amp 19, 23, 24, 109  
Bi-wiring 23  
Brightness 84  
C
Center Image 83  
Center Width 83  
Channel Level 104, 110  
Chroma Level 84  
Contrast 84  
K
KURO LINK 29, 79–81  
L
LFE Attenuate 83  
Loudness 82  
CONTROL jack 37  
D
M
Data Management 106  
Deep Color 29  
Manual MCACC 98  
Manual speaker setup 108  
MCACC Data 104  
MCACC preset 62, 82, 107  
Midnight 82  
Multi Zone 19, 22, 24, 35–36, 85, 109, 113  
Multichannel analog input 31, 47, 112  
Default system settings 88  
Demo 95  
Detail 84  
Dialog Enhancement 82  
Digital Noise Reduction 82  
Digital Video Conversion 84  
Dimension 83  
Display 15, 87, 121  
Dolby 57, 127  
N
Neural THX 52, 131  
DTS 57, 128  
Dual Mono 82  
135  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
O
U
Optimum Surround 57  
Up Mix 61  
OSD Language (GUI) 42  
USB 40, 49–51, 125  
Playable file formats 51  
P
V
Panorama 83  
Phase control 63  
Placing 20  
Video cable 25  
Video converter 25  
VIDEO PARAMETER 83  
Volume Limit 113  
Play 46  
Power cord 41  
Power ON Level 113  
PQLS 81  
W
Pre-out 33  
WMA9 129  
WMA9 Pro 32  
Progressive Motion 84  
Pure direct 60  
PureCinema 84  
X
x.v.Color 29  
X-Curve 111  
R
Recording 86  
Remote control 11, 12, 89–94, 114, 121  
Reset 88  
Resolution 84  
Y
YNR 84  
S
SACD Gain 83  
Setup microphone 97  
Sharpness 84  
Sleep timer 86  
Sound Delay 82  
Sound Retriever 82  
Speaker 19–24, 115  
Speaker B 19, 22, 24, 84, 109  
Speaker Distance 105, 111  
Speaker Setting 104, 109  
Standard surround 57  
Standing Wave 82, 100  
Status 87  
Stereo 59  
Stream direct 60, 133  
Surround back channel processing 61  
Surround back speaker 109  
Synchronized amp mode 81  
System Setup 108  
T
THX 20, 96, 111, 129  
Home THX 58  
Tone Control 82  
Treble 82  
Troubleshooting 116  
Tuner 33, 52–53  
136  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
13  
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime  
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will  
provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since  
hearing damage from loud noise is often  
undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer  
and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid  
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of  
sound levels is included for your protection.  
Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit  
you’ve just purchased is only the start of your  
musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how  
you can maximize the fun and excitement your  
equipment offers. This manufacturer and the  
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer  
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of  
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that  
lets the sound come through loud and clear without  
annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly,  
without affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Decibel  
Level Example  
30 Quiet library, soft whispers  
40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic  
50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office  
60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine  
70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant  
80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock  
at two feet.  
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing  
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound.  
So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and  
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by  
setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your  
hearing adapts.  
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS  
UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE  
90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower  
100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill  
120 Rock band concert in front of speakers,  
thunderclap  
To establish a safe level:  
• Start your volume control at a low setting.  
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it  
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.  
140 Gunshot blast, jet plane  
180 Rocket launching pad  
Once you have established a comfortable sound  
level:  
• Set the dial and leave it there.  
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.  
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent  
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we  
want you listening for a lifetime.  
S001_En  
137  
en  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you  
wish to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent  
Service Company, or if you wish to purchase replacement  
parts, operating instructions, service manuals, or  
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous  
adresser à un distributeur autorisé Pioneer du Canada pour  
obtenir le nom du Centre de Service Autorisé Pioneer le plus  
près de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à  
la clientèle de Pioneer:  
accessories, please call the number shown below.  
1 – 8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 4 0 4  
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.  
Service Clientèle  
Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first  
calling the Customer Support at the above listed number for  
assistance.  
300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2  
1-877-283-5901  
905-479-4411  
Pioneer Electronics Service, Inc.  
P.O. BOX 1760, Long Beach,  
CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.  
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez  
vous reporter au feuillet sur la garantie restreinte qui  
accompagne le produit.  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty  
sheet included with your product.  
S018_C_EF  
Should this product require service in Canada, please  
contact a Pioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the  
nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.  
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction  
Department at the following address:  
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.  
Customer Satisfaction Department  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2  
1-877-283-5901  
905-479-4411  
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty  
sheet included with your product.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D. F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_B_En  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2009 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
<ARB7421-A>  
Printed in  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips Cell Phone CT9A9VBLK User Manual
Philips CRT Television 1 IB7771 E001 User Manual
Philips DVD Player PET824 User Manual
Philips Stereo Amplifier TDA1521A User Manual
Philips Stereo System MX3600 User Manual
Planar Car Video System PXL2230MW User Manual
Planet Technology Network Card PL 101E User Manual
Planet Technology Network Router WRT 410A User Manual
Poulan Lawn Mower 176038 User Manual
Prince Castle Outdoor Timer 740 T44 User Manual